PROJECT MANUAL FOR Tenant Improvements for MEDQUEST ... · DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS. Tenant...

PROJECT MANUAL FOR

Tenant Improvements for

MEDQUEST ASSOCIATES, INC.

Panama City, Florida

PROJECT NO. 14004.02

June 3, 2015

GEORGE KOPER ASSOCIATES, PA 3001 North 12TH Avenue Pensacola, Florida 32503 (850) 435-1515

MECHANICAL/PLUMBING

H.M. Yonge & Associates, Inc. 401 East Chase Street Pensacola, Florida 32501 (850) 434-2661

ELECTRICAL H.M. Yonge & Associates, Inc. 401 East Chase Street Pensacola, Florida 32501 (850) 434-2661

Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. TOC - 1

June 26, 2015 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents

SECTION NO. DIVISION/SECTION TITLE

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

00020 INVITATION TO BID

00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

00300 BID PROPOSAL

01100 SUMMARY

01210 ALLOWANCES

01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES

01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING

01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

01820 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

DIVISION 2 SITEWORK

02361 TERMITE CONTROL

02828 VINYL FENCES AND GATES

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE

03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

DIVISION 4 MASONRY

-------- No Work in this Division

DIVISION 5 METALS

05160 UNISTRUT ENGINEERED SUPPORT SYSTEMS

05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

05500 METAL FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS



06105 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY

06410 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07210 BUILDING INSULATION

07841 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

07920 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS

08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

08710 FINISH HARDWARE

08800 GLAZING

DIVISION 9 FINISHES

09111 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

09250 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

09310 CERAMIC TILE

09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

09651 RESILIANT FLOOR TILE

09652 RESILIENT PLANK FLOORING

09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES

09912 PAINTING

09960 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES

10265 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION

10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

10523 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT


DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS


DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13090 RADIATION PROTECTION

DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS




DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL

15100 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

15200 TESTING AND BALANCING AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

15400 PLUMBING

15800 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL

16100 ELECTRICAL

Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 00020 - 1 June 3, 2015 INVITATION TO BID

SECTION 00020 - INVITATION TO BID

Sealed bids for the Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc., Panama City, Florida will be received until 4:00 PM CDT, Thursday, July 9, 2015 at the Architect’s office. All bids must be delivered to the Architect’s office. You may send via U.S. Mail or overnight delivery (Federal Express, hand-delivered, etc.) at the following address:

George Koper George Koper Associates, PA

3001 North 12th Ave. Pensacola, FL 32503

(850) 255-8425 Email - Alternate delivery method: Bids shall be accepted by email under the following conditions: 1. The bid is emailed only to Ben Poffenberger at George Koper Associates at:

[email protected] 2. The bid is presented attached to the email as a pdf scan of the Bid Proposal form with all

required signatures, notary and other requested information on the form fully completed and legible.

3. Bids sent by email must be received in Ben Poffenberger’s Inbox prior to the deadline date and time set in the Invitation to Bid and Bidder accepts any and all risks of failure of delivery by the deadline date and time.

The Work of this Project consists of Interior Build-out, Plumbing, Mechanical, Electrical Work and

Installation of Medical Equipment for Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc., Panama City, Florida. Invited bidders will be emailed PDF files of the original bid documents. Any reproduction costs are to be borne by the Contractor. END OF SECTION 00020

Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 00200 - 1 June 26, 2015 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. To receive full consideration, all bids must be executed and submitted in strict accordance with the “Instructions to Bidders.”

C. This solicitation is for invited Bidders only.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting bids for consideration as the prime contractor to be chosen for entering into a contract for construction with the owner.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for submitting Substitution Requests during the bid process.

2. Division 2 – 16 for specific requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. All definitions as set forth in AIA Document A201, “GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION” shall apply to this section.

B. All reference, throughout this Specification, to a time period involving number of days shall be understood to mean “calendar: days, unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Contract Documents may be obtained only by email. Architect shall email the bid documents in the form of PDF files attached to emails sent directly to one point of contact for each invited Bidder. Emails shall be sent simultaneously by way of bcc. A maximum total file size of 20M will be attached to any one email; multiple emails may be necessary to disseminate all the files comprising the whole Contract Documents.


1.5 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDER

A. The apparent successful bidder shall, upon the request of the Architect, furnish documentation of the following:

1. He is currently registered with or holds an unexpired Certificate issued by the Florida Construction Industry Licensing Board in accordance with current applicable regulations, Licensing of Construction Industry, Florida Statues.

2. He presently maintains a permanent bona fide place of business practicing this type of work and has had the appropriate experience;

3. And, he has available, or can obtain, adequate equipment and financial resources to undertake and execute the Contract properly and expeditiously, in accordance with present day practices.

1.6 BIDDERS REPRESENTATION

A. Each bidder, by submitting his bid, represents all of the following:

1. He has thoroughly examined all the Contract Documents and is aware that his work my be shown on one or more of the sheets comprising the set of Drawings and/or as called for in the Specifications, and that the bid proposal shall include all work shown as well as work specifically called for or reasonably implied as necessary to execute and complete his Contract;

2. He has made a complete examination of the site of the Project, and familiarized himself with all the conditions under which he is obliged to operate in the performance of the Contract;

3. His bid is based upon all materials and equipment described in the Drawings and Specifications;

4. He is familiar with all Federal, State and Local regulations having jurisdiction over the construction of the Project, and these rules and regulations shall apply to the Contract through-out and shall form a part of these Specifications as if rewritten here in full.

1.7 CONSTRUCTION TIME FRAME

A. The contractor shall have 180 days from written notice to proceed to obtain Substantial Completion of the project. Contractor’s proposal shall reflect all required efforts, materials, equipment and scheduling to achieve this date.

B. The contractor shall have 120 days from written notice to proceed to obtain Substantial Completion of MRI rooms 112 and 128, MRI control rooms 111 and 127, and MRI Equipment rooms 113 and 129 for the installation of MRI equipment.


1.8 INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. All bidders requiring further information or requesting interpretation of the Contract Documents regarding any ambiguity, inconsistency or error therein shall make a written request of the Architect not later than five (5) days prior to the date of receipt of bids.

B. Any and all interpretation or correction will be issued in Addendum form by the Architect, and only such written interpretation shall be binding. No bidder shall rely upon any interpretation or correction given by any other method.

1. An addendum is a written or graphic supplement issued prior to date for receipt of bids which modifies or further interprets the Contract Documents by means of addition, deletion, clarification or correction. An addendum will become part of the Contract Documents when the Contract is executed. The bidder shall acknowledge receipt of all addenda on the bid form in the space provided.

C. Questions received less than five (5) days prior to day for receipt of bids will not be acknowledged. If the Bidder becomes aware of a discrepancy or ambiguity in the documents which has not been clarified by Addendum, he/she shall submit his/her proposal based upon the greater quantity or value which shall take precedence until such time that the Architect can provide a written clarification and/or interpretation.

1.9 BIDDERS FORM OF PROPOSAL

A. All bids shall be prepared on the Contractor’s letterhead in the Form of Proposal as provided herein and submitted in accordance with these Instructions to Bidders. No other form of proposal will be accepted. The Form of Proposal included in the Specifications shall be referenced only.

B. Each form of proposal provides for the recording of one total stipulated lump-sum bid, (Base Bid) which shall include general construction, mechanical, plumbing, electrical, painting, rough carpentry, finishes, millwork, accessories and all other items of work that may be required by the Contract Documents, as well as Contractor’s proposed time for completion of the Project.

1. All blanks on the bid form shall be filled in by typewriter or manually in ink.

2. Where so indicated by the makeup of the Bid Form, sums shall be expressed in both words and figures, and in case of discrepancy between the two, the amount written in words shall govern.

3. Interlineations, alterations and erasures must be initialed by the signer of the Bid.

4. Each copy of the Bid shall include the legal name of the Bidder and a statement that the Bidder is a sole proprietor, partnership, corporation or other legal entity. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent


shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent’s authority to bind the Bidder.

1.10 BIDDING PROCEDURES

A. Bidders shall submit all Forms(s) of Proposal, properly signed and completed in every respect as per these Instructions to Bidders, prominently marked:

Sealed Bid for the “Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc.”

All proposals shall be delivered to the Architect’s office no later than 4:00 PM CDT, on July 9, 2015. Architect’s address is:

George Koper Associates 3001 North 12th Avenue, Pensacola, Florida 32503 (850) 435-1515 Email bids shall be delivered per instructions in Section 00020 to: [email protected]

B. All bids shall be held for a period of sixty (60) days after their receipt, during which time the Owner has the right to enter a Contract.

C. The Owner shall be entitled to waive any minor or non-substantial irregularities in the submission of bids and to accept the Bid which in the Owner’s judgment is in the Owner’s best interests.

D. A bidder may withdraw his Bid, either in person or by written request, at any time prior to the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids. Negligence on the part of the bidder in preparing his Bid confers no right for the withdrawal of the Bid after it has been opened.

1.11 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDS

A. The bidder acknowledges the right of the Owner to reject any or all bids.

B. Bids may be disqualified and rejected under any or all of the following conditions:

1. If the Bid has not been deposited at the designated location prior to the date and time for receipt as indicated in these “Instructions to Bidders”;

2. If there is reason to believe that a Bidder has submitted more than one Bid for the same project;

3. If there is reason to believe that collusion exists among the Bidders.


1.12 SUBMISSION OF POST BID INFORMATION

A. The successful bidder shall, prior to the execution of the construction Contract, submit the following:

1. A schedule of values for each major item of the Work with the breakdown patterned after C.S.I. Specification section and by construction phase; each listed amount shall include overhead and profit, and the aggregate amount shall be equal to the Contract Sum.

2. Construction progress schedule, submit a comprehensive bar chart type progress schedule indicating a time bar for each category of work, sequencing of work items and show time allowances for submittals, (product data, certifications, etc.) review and approval.

3. Furnish in writing for acceptance by the Owner and Architect a list of all sub-contractors and major material suppliers proposed for the principal portions of Work. Do not enter any contractual relationships with a sub-contractor or major material supplier until written approval is received from the Owner and/or Architect.

1.13 EXECUTION OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

A. The selected bidder shall, unless otherwise agreed to by the Owner execute and submit the Construction Contract within ten (10) days of receiving written notification of selection from Owner, or authorized representative, and shall submit the Performance/Labor and Material Bonds and all other required documents with the executed contract.

1.14 CAUTION

A. The Contractor shall recognize that the Owner is not a technician or consultant in the building industry; therefore, the Contractor shall transact all business relative to the Bidding and Contract Documents through the Architect as agent. Any deviation from this procedure shall relieve the Owner and Architect of any responsibility in the event of subsequent circumstances.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 00200


14. EXECUTION OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

A. The selected bidder shall, unless otherwise agreed to by the Owner execute and submit the Construction Contract within ten (10) days of receiving written notification of selection from Owner, or authorized representative, and shall submit the Performance/Labor and Material Bonds and all other required documents with the executed contract.

15. CAUTION

A. The Contractor shall recognize that the Owner is not a technician or consultant in the building industry; therefore, the Contractor shall transact all business relative to the Bidding and Contract Documents through the Architect as agent. Any deviation from this procedure shall relieve the Owner and Architect of any responsibility in the event of subsequent circumstances.

END OF SECTION

Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. June 3, 2015 BID PROPOSAL 00300 - 1

SECTION 00300 - BID PROPOSAL _____________________________________________________________ (Company Name) _____________________________________________________________ (Address) _____________________________________________________________ (City, State, Zip Code) _____________________________________________________________ (Telephone No.) Medquest Associates, Inc. 3480 Preston Ridge Road Suite 600 Alpharetta, Georgia 30005

Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. Panama City, Florida Gentlemen: The Undersigned is the owner, manager, officer partner, other: ___________________________ of the business entity submitting this bid. Further, the Undersigned certifies that he/she has full authority to submit this Bid, and execute a contract should it be offered. The Undersigned, as either Bidder or authorized officer or agent thereof, declares on behalf of the Bidder:

1. I have carefully examined or caused to be examined the Site where the Work is to be done;

2. I have read the Project Manual;

3. I have read all Contract Documents and Addenda, if any, prior to the opening of bids; and,

4. I am fully aware of the conditions under which the Work is to be done. The Undersigned, as either the Bidder or authorized officer or agent thereof agrees on behalf of the Bidder, that if the Bid hereby submitted is accepted, he/she will:

1. Execute a written contract with the Owner in the form specified; and,

2. Furnish all materials, equipment, machinery, tools, apparatus, means of transportation, supervision, and labor necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

The Undersigned as either Bidder or authorized officer of agent thereof agrees to furnish the necessary materials, equipment, labor, and supervision, and to do the necessary Work as required by the Contract Documents to complete the items on which bids are submitted, at the prices quoted in the following:


BID PROPOSAL ITEMS

Base Bid: Includes all building components, electrical, and mechanical systems, related work, and necessary components to complete the Work indicated. The Undersigned agrees to undertake the Work as indicated on the Drawings and in the Project Manual for a base bid of $____________________.

The Bidder hereby agrees to accept the award of the Contract for which he/she has inserted bid prices above. In submitting this Bid, it is understood that the right is reserved by the Owner to reject any and all bids. If written notice of the acceptance of this Bid is mailed, telegraphed, or delivered to the Undersigned within forty-five (45) days after the opening thereof, or at any time thereafter before his/her Bid is withdrawn, the Undersigned agrees to execute and deliver a Contract in the prescribed form with ten (10) days after Contract is presented to him/her for acceptance.

The Undersigned agrees that, if awarded the Contract, he/she will commence Work within ten (10) days of Written Notice to Proceed, and that the proposed facility will be available for Substantial Completion one-hundred-eighty (180) calendar days after Notice to Proceed, and that Final Completion will be fourteen (14) calendar days after date of Substantial Completion.

By submitting this Bid Proposal form, the Bidder certifies that he has visited the Project Site; is aware of existing conditions which affect the Work; and, has reviewed the Contract Documents, including the following Addenda: (insert Addenda, if any)


Sub-Contractor List: Submit with this Bid Proposal form a list of proposed sub-contractors for the trades indicated below:

1. Mechanical.

2. Electrical.

3. Plumbing.

4. Flooring.

5. Paint/Wall Covering.

6. Acoustical Ceilings.

7. Drywall.

8. Casework/Millwork

9. MBE/WBE %. Signed and sealed this _____________ day of ____________________, 2015. ____________________________________________ Bidder or: ____________________________________________ Authorized Officer of Agent ____________________________________________ Business Address END OF SECTION 00300

Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 01100 - 1 June 3, 2015 SUMMARY

SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification: Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc.

1. Project Location: 2525 Highway 77, Panama City, Florida, 32405

B. Architect Identification: The project documents, dated June 3, 2015, were prepared for the Project by George Koper Associates, P.A.

C. The Work consists of the build-out of a one story medical office building.

1. The Work includes but is not limited to the following products and systems:

� Sitework and utilities

� Concrete

� Cold formed metal framing

� Structural Steel

� Interior millwork

� Insulation

� Doors and windows

� Gypsum board assemblies

� Suspended ceiling assemblies

� Interior finishes and painting

� Mechanical equipment

� Ductwork

� HVAC controls


� Plumbing piping and fixtures

� Testing and balancing of HVAC systems

� Electrical power and lighting devices

� Electrical panel boards

1.3 USE OF PREMISES

A. General: Contractor shall have partial use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Areas of the site available for the Contractor’s use shall be as agreed between the Contractor and the Owner prior to start of construction. Contractor's use of the agreed upon areas is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of the Project.

1.4 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. Owner will furnish a list of owner purchased equipment. The Work includes providing support systems to receive Owner's equipment and providing plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections.

1. Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to Contractor.

2. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to Contractor's Construction Schedule.

3. After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be present for and assist in Owner's inspection.

4. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for replacement.

5. Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for delivery of manufacturer's warranties to Contractor.

6. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner-furnished products. Using Owner-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule.

7. Contractor shall review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and return them to Architect noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of product.

8. Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner-furnished items at Project site.

9. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage during storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements.

10. If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor shall repair or replace them.


1.5 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's "Master Format" numbering system.

1. Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.

a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

1.6 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS


PART 3 - EXECUTION


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 01210 - 1 June 26, 2015 ALLOWANCES

SECTION 01210 - ALLOWANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.

1. Certain materials and equipment are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. In some cases, these allowances include installation. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.

B. Types of allowances include the following:

1. Lump-sum allowances.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders.

1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE

A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.

B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.

C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders.

Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 01210 - 2 June 26, 2015 ALLOWANCES

B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.

1.5 UNUSED MATERIALS

A. Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted.

1. If requested by Architect, prepare unused material for storage by Owner when it is not economically practical to return the material for credit. If directed by Architect, deliver unused material to Owner's storage space. Otherwise, disposal of unused material is Contractor's responsibility.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work.

3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES

A. Interior Signage: Provide a $1,500 lump sum allowance to furnish and install interior signage.

B. Toilet/Dressing Room Mirrors: Provide a $300 allowance per mirror to furnish and install toilet/dressing room mirrors in rooms 132, 133, 134, 135, 136.

C. Lead Apron Rack: Provide a $500 allowance per lead apron rack to furnish and install lead apron racks as indicated in the drawings.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 01250 - 1 June 3, 2015 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.


1. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within 20 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration,


start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

5. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701CMa.

1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 01290 - 1 June 3, 2015 PAYMENT PROCEDURES

SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.


1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule.

2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

3. Sub-schedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide sub-schedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.


1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value.

1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work

where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required.

6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.


1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Payment Application Forms: Payment application form shall be as agreed between Owner and Contractor. .

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

E. Transmittal: Submit 4 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt. All copies shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, before deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must

submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every

entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.

G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values.


3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list. 5. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for

performance of the Work. 10. Initial progress report. 11. Report of preconstruction conference. 12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 13. Performance and payment bonds. 14. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. 15. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required.

H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and

proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment" if applicable. 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data

as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.




Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 01310 - 1 June 3, 2015 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Coordination Drawings. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Project meetings. 4. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).


1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request for Interpretation from the Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications and Drawings to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different sections or drawings, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 3. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different

components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.


B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.6 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL

A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.

1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.


3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within five days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner, and Architect, but no later than 15 days from Notice to Proceed. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. c. Designation of key personnel and their duties. d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. e. Procedures for RFIs. f. Procedures for testing and inspecting. g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. h. Distribution of the Contract Documents. i. Submittal procedures. j. Preparation of Record Documents. k. Use of the premises and existing building. l. Work restrictions. m. Owner's occupancy requirements. n. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. o. Parking availability. p. Office, work, and storage areas. q. Equipment deliveries and priorities. r. First aid. s. Security. t. Progress cleaning. u. Working hours.

3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:


a. The Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Submittals. f. Review of mockups. g. Possible conflicts. h. Compatibility problems. i. Time schedules. j. Weather limitations. k. Manufacturer's written recommendations. l. Warranty requirements. m. Compatibility of materials. n. Acceptability of substrates. o. Space and access limitations. p. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. q. Testing and inspecting requirements. r. Installation procedures. s. Coordination with other work. t. Required performance results. u. Protection of adjacent work. v. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.


1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Status of correction of deficient items. 6) Field observations. 7) RFIs. 8) Status of proposal requests. 9) Pending changes. 10) Status of Change Orders. 11) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties

who should have been present.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

1.8 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor. 4. Name of Architect. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract

Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.


10. Contractor's signature. 11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product

Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments.

C. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow ten working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log bi-weekly. Provide Software log with not less than the following:

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted.


7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive,

and Proposal Request, as appropriate.




Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 01320 - 1 June 3, 2015 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Preliminary Construction Schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Submittals Schedule. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Special reports.


1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and

distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and

inspections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.


C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity.

2. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

F. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail.

G. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element.

H. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.

I. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity relationships.

J. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.

B. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit three opaque copies.

1. Approval of cost-loaded preliminary construction schedule will not constitute approval of Schedule of Values for cost-loaded activities.

C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit three opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period.

1. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on CD-R, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated) and date on label.


D. Daily Construction Reports: Submit three copies at bi-weekly intervals.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the Preliminary Construction Schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including work stages, interim milestones and partial Owner

occupancy. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 7. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and

inspecting agencies. 8. Review time required for completion and startup procedures. 9. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 10. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE

A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.

1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule.


2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling."

B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of Final Completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following:

D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed

by Owner. 2. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Environmental control.

3. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. l. Startup and placement into final use and operation.

E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.

F. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.


G. Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)

A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.

B. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a computerized, time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work.

1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed.

a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule.

2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information.

3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.

4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time. Include list of nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule.

C. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.

1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities:

a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing.

2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates.

3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as


often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.

4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges.

a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path.

2.4 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 3. Equipment at Project site. 4. Material deliveries. 5. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 6. Accidents. 7. Meetings and significant decisions. 8. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 9. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 10. Meter readings and similar recordings. 11. Emergency procedures. 12. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 13. Change Orders received and implemented. 14. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 15. Services connected and disconnected. 16. Equipment or system tests and startups. 17. Partial Completions and occupancies. 18. Substantial Completions authorized.

2.5 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one] day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, sub-contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and

post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 01330 - 1 June 26, 2015 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.


1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment. 2. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection

reports and Delegated-Design Submittals and for erecting mockups. 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties Project Record

Documents and operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings,

Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 5. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and

maintenance manual requirements. 6. Division 1 Section “Product Requirements” for substitutions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's approval. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.


2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities.

D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 working days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is required, allow 21 working days for initial review of each submittal.

3. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

4. Allow 15 working days for processing each resubmittal. 5. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit

submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing.

E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches (100 by 125 mm) on label or beside

title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Unique identifier, including revision number. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Other necessary identification.

F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.


G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor.

1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the related submittal.

2. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of the Contract Documents.

3. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. i. Remarks. j. Signature of transmitter.

H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

I. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.

1. Number of Copies: Submit eight copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect, will return five copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.


3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. l. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. m. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and

control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 40 inches (750 by 1000 mm).

4. Number of Copies: Submit eight blue- or black-line prints of each submittal, unless prints are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain three prints; remainder will be returned

D. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following:

1. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups.


2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

3. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

4. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name or name of manufacturer. c. Sample source.

5. Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, provide the following:

a. Size limitations. b. Compliance with recognized standards. c. Availability. d. Delivery time.

6. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

a. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of the variations.

b. Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics.

7. Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit one full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

8. Number of Samples for Verification: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned.

a. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.


9. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

E. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

F. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

G. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

H. Lighting Product Submittal: Comply with “Product Requirements.” Submit lighting product submittal for review within 30 days after commencement of the work.

2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.

1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies.

2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.


D. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements.

E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project.

G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements.

I. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements.

J. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements.

K. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

L. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements.

M. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

N. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product.


6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

O. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures.

P. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

Q. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

R. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.

3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed

performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

S. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.

T. Construction Photographs Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation.

U. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit information directly to Owner. If submitted to Architect, Architect will not review this information but will return it with no action taken.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken.

C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 01400 - 1 June 3, 2015 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.


1. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction

disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed construction complies with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.


C. Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and materials. Mockups are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

1.4 DELEGATED DESIGN

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.


6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies

with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

B. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and similar regulations governing the Work, nor interfere with local trade-union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions.


G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed.

H. Preconstruction Testing: Testing agency shall perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods.

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and construction. Provide sizes and configurations of assemblies to adequately demonstrate capability of product to comply with performance requirements.

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

c. Fabricate and install test assemblies using installers who will perform the same tasks for Project.

d. When testing is complete, remove assemblies; do not reuse materials on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or

construction. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard

for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

1.7 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform Quality Control services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.


2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

3. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

4. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner.

1. Testing agency will notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

4. Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

5. Testing agency will retest and reinspect corrected work.

D. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing.

E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents.

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.


2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by

testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at

Project site.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.


1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching.

2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 01500 - 1 June 3, 2015 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Standards: Comply with NFPA No. 241, Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations; ANSI A10 Series Standards for Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition; and, NECA Electrical Design Library's Temporary Electrical Facilities.

1. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and

regulations for temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA No. 70.

B. At the earliest possible time, change over from use of temporary utility services to

use of permanent utilities. C. Remove temporary facilities and controls before Substantial Completion.

Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities under conditions acceptable to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Not applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. Provide temporary electric power, lighting, water, and fire-protection service(s) as required for construction. Arrange for and coordinate service(s) with local utility companies.

B. Provide temporary heat for curing or drying of Work, and for protection of new

construction from adverse effects of low temperatures. Use of gasoline-burning heaters and open-flame heaters is not permitted.

C. Provide temporary sanitary facilities. Comply with regulations and health codes

for type, number, location, and maintenance of facilities. 3.02 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 01500 - 2 June 3, 2015 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

A. Provide field offices, storage trailers, and other support facilities as necessary for efficient prosecution of the Work.

1. Temporary facilities located within the construction area or within 30' of

building lines shall be of non-combustible construction.

B. Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction and workers from exposure and inclement weather and for containment of heat.

C. Install project identification and other signs in locations approved by Owner to

inform the public and persons seeking entrance to Project.

D. Collect waste daily and when containers are full, dispose of waste off-site according to local ordinances.

1. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from

other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material according to applicable laws and regulations.

3.03 TEMPORARY CONTROLS

A. Provide temporary fire protection until permanent systems supply fire-protection needs.

1. Provide adequate numbers and types of fire extinguishers. 2. Store combustible materials in fire-safe containers in fire-safe locations. 3. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas. 4. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and

similar sources of fire ignition.

B. Provide temporary barricades, warning signs, and lights to protect the public and construction personnel from construction hazards.

1. Enclose construction area(s) with fence(s) with lockable entrance gates, to

prevent unauthorized access.

C. Provide temporary environmental controls as required by authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to, erosion and sediment control, dust control, noise control, and pollution control.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 01600 - 1 June 26, 2015 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.


1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for contract closeout.

2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.


C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.

D. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

E. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Requests for substitution for named products or equals thereto shall be received 7 days prior to bid. Substitutions of named products after this time will not be accepted. Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 1.5C during bidding phase. Use CSI Form 13.1A after bidding.

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable:

a. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

b. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

c. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

d. Samples, where applicable or requested. e. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. f. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and

interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. g. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in

effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

h. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.


i. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

j. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation after receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution.

k. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

5. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.

6. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 7. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a

weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.

8. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.

9. Protect stored products from damage.


B. Storage: Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: Forms are included with the Specifications. Prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed.

3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's.

6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products.

7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following:


1. Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a single product and manufacturer, provide the product named.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturer" or "Source" name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by the manufacturer or from the source named that complies with requirements.

3. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.

4. Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.

5. Available Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed or another product that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed or another manufacturer that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

7. Product Options: Where Specification paragraphs titled "Product Options" indicate that size, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide either the specific product or system indicated or a comparable product or system by another manufacturer. Comply with provisions in "Product Substitutions" Article.

8. Basis-of-Design Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Basis-of-Design Product" are included and also introduce or refer to a list of manufacturers' names, provide either the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.

a. If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents on "substitutions" for selection of a matching product.

10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with other specified requirements.

a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color,


pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.

b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 30 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.

1. Lighting product submittals: Substitutions for lighting product submittals will only be considered by the Architect during the bidding phase. After bidding phase, submit lighting product listed in the drawings or specifications or approved substitution(s) from the bidding phase.

B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.

3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction

Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product:


1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.



Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 01731 - 1 June 3, 2015 CUTTING AND PATCHING

SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.


1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

2. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching fire-rated construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided.

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that

cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted.


6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure.

7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.


A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operating elements include the following:

1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire-suppression systems. 4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 5. Control systems. 6. Communication systems. 7. Conveying systems. 8. Electrical wiring systems. 9. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections.

C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following:

1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Exterior curtain-wall or storefront construction. 4. Equipment supports. 5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 6. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.


1.6 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.


3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations.

5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials to match existing, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.


a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition.

D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 01770 - 1 June 3, 2015 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project Record Documents. 3. Operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Warranties. 5. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 6. Final cleaning.


1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion.

2. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.

3. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.

4. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instruction of Owner's personnel.

5. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for products of those Sections.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service

agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.


4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.

8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate

visual defects.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems.


B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for

ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the

markup before enclosing concealed installations. d. Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of

showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings.


2. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.

3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification where applicable.

5. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Include identification on cover sheets. Provide record drawings in a PDF format on a portable electronic media device.

C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. Provide record specifications in a PDF format on a portable electronic media device. Mark to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data, where applicable.

D. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. Provide record product data in a PDF format on a portable electronic media device. Mark set to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Record Specifications, where applicable.

E. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Provide miscellaneous record submittals in a PDF format on a portable electronic media device.

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows:

1. Operation Data:


a. Emergency instructions and procedures. b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating

standards. c. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend

operations. d. Description of controls and sequence of operations. e. Piping diagrams.

2. Maintenance Data:

a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts. b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier. c. Maintenance procedures. d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance. e. Maintenance record forms. f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials. g. Copies of maintenance service agreements. h. Copies of warranties and bonds.

B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents.

1.8 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (115-by-280-mm) paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.


D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. 2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires

seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season. 3. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice. 4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of

instruction, and course content.

B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include instruction for the following:

1. System design and operational philosophy. 2. Review of documentation. 3. Operations. 4. Adjustments. 5. Troubleshooting. 6. Maintenance. 7. Repair.

3.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.


B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;

shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and

windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

j. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and

surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.

l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains

resulting from water exposure. o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. p. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during

construction.


q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.

D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 01782 - 1 June 3, 2015 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of systems and equipment.


1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals.

4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for products in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Final Submittal: Submit 1 copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments.


1.5 COORDINATION

A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with the same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner.


4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (115-by-280-mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (115-by-280-mm), 20-lb/sq. ft. (75-g/sq. m) white bond paper.

5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.


2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:


1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:


1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in the manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including

disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available.


E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from


the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents."

G. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for the schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 01820 - 1 June 3, 2015 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

SECTION 01820 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Instruction Program: Submit two copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

1. At completion of training, submit one complete training manual for Owner's use.

B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.

D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test.

E. Demonstration and Training Videotape: Submit two copies at end of each training module.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.


B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

C. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational

materials, instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.

3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather

conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections, and as follows:

1. Motorized doors, including automatic entrance doors. 2. Fire-protection systems, including fire alarm and fire-extinguishing systems. 3. Medical equipment, including medical gas equipment and piping. 4. Heat generation, including boilers feedwater equipment pumps steam distribution

piping and water distribution piping. 5. Refrigeration systems, including chillers cooling towers condensers pumps and

distribution piping. 6. HVAC systems, including air-handling equipment air distribution systems and

terminal equipment and devices. 7. HVAC instrumentation and controls.


8. Electrical service and distribution, including transformers switchboards panelboards uninterruptible power supplies and motor controls.

9. Lighting equipment and controls. 10. Communication systems, including intercommunication clocks and programming

voice and data and television equipment.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design

responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project Record Documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.

b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures.


g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual.

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.


3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.

2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.

D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.

E. Demonstration and Training Videotape: Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation." 2. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning

objective and lesson outline.

F. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 02361 - 1 June 26, 2015 TERMITE CONTROL

SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Soil treatment with termiticide.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Service Life of Soil Treatment: Soil treatment by use of a termiticide that is effective for not less than five years against infestation of subterranean termites.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For termiticide.

1. Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide products.

B. Product Certificates: For termite control products, signed by product manufacturer.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer of termite control products.

D. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for Owner's record information, including the following:

1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application.

E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.



A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides according to the EPA-Registered Label.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain termite control products from a single manufacturer for each product.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPA-Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs before construction.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Products that may be incorporated into the Work without substitution or equal:

1. Termiticides:

a. Provide Premise Pre-Construction Insecticide by Bayer.


2.2 SOIL TREATMENT

A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control.

1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparation before beginning application of termite control treatment. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations.

B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer.

1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.

3.4 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT

A. Use Florida Pest Control to comply with landlord’s contract and maintain existing warrantees.


B. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly.

1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed.

2. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab, and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; also along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings.

3. Masonry: Treat voids. 4. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be

penetrated.

C. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.

D. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions.

E. Post warning signs in areas of application.

F. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 02828 - 1 June 3, 2015 VINYL FENCES AND GATES

SECTION 02828 – VINYL FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section Includes:

1. Vinyl Fences 2. Swing Gates.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 3 Section Cast-in-Place Concrete for post concrete fill.


A. Structurally sound to withstand 140MPH wind.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For gates. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each fence material and for each color specified.

1. Provide Samples 12 inches (300 mm) in length for linear materials. 2. Provide Samples of post cap.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for decorative vinyl fences, including finish, indicating compliance with referenced standard.

E. Maintenance Data: For gates and vinyl finishes to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.


B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VINYL

A. Fence Components and Shapes: PVC with ultraviolet stabilizing formula.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

1. For aluminum, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for strength and compatibility in fabricated items.

B. Concrete: Normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete complying with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

C. Nonshrink Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107 and specifically recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications.

2.3 VINYL SHADOWBOX FENCES

A. PVC Shadowbox Fences: Comply with standard for commercial application.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide SHADOWBOX PRIVACY FENCE by A VINYL FENCE & DECK WHOLESALER or comparable product.

B. Heavy Duty Shadowbox privacy fence: 6’-0” Tall x 6’-0” Wide Sections.

C. Pickets: 7/8” x 6” PVC picket with minimum wall thickness of 0.65”

D. Posts: 5” x 5” x 108” PVC heavy duty post with aluminum insert for commercial strength.

E. Horizontal Rails: 3.5” x 3.5” x 71.75” heavy duty PVC rails.

1. Bottom Rail reinforced with aluminum “I” channel.

F. Post Caps: Manufacturer’s standard PVC Outside Pyramid cap in color to match post.

G. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard concealed corrosion-resistant fastening system.

H. Finish: from manufacturer’s standard color pallet.


2.4 SWING GATES

A. Gate Configuration: Double leaf.

B. Gate Frame Height: 72”.

C. Gate Opening Width: 72”.

D. Infill: Comply with requirements for adjacent fence.

E. Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, hinges. Provide center gate stops and cane bolts for pairs of gates. Fabricate latches with integral eye openings for padlocking.

F. Hinges: manufacturer’s corrosion-resistant type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, construction layout, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by Architect.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 VINYL FENCE INSTALLATION

A. Install fences according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 GATE INSTALLATION

A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.


B. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain gates.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 03300 - 1 June 3, 2015 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

B. See Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.

C. Shop Drawings: For steel reinforcement. Material test reports.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

B. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.


C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I II I/II.

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C, F. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded, 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum coarse-aggregate size.

1. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

E. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament or fibrillated polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches long.

F. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,

Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive joint tape.


2.4 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.

F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering.

G. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.

H. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.

2.5 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

B. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches

before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.

4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

5. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd.


2.7 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.8 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

3.2 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

3.4 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:


1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.

C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.

D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.

3.6 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.

C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.


1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-foot- long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch

D. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces.

E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-

retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.


3.8 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Tests will be performed according to ACI 301.

1. Testing Frequency: One composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd, but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof.

2. Mold and cure three cylinders from each sample in accordance with ASTM C 31/C 31M. Record any deviations from the ASTM requirements in the test report.

3. Test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 39. Test one specimen at 7 days for information, and two specimens at 28 days for acceptance, unless otherwise specified. The compressive strength test results for acceptance shall be the average of the compressive strengths from the two specimens tested at 28 days. If one specimen in a test shows evidence of improper sampling, molding, or testing, discard the specimen and consider the strength of the remaining cylinder to be the test result. If both specimens in a test show any defects, discard the entire test.

4. Determine slump of each composite sample taken and whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary, using ASTM C 143/C 143M.

5. Determine the temperature of each composite sample taken using ASTM C 1064.

6. Determine the air content of normal weight concrete using ASTM C 231, C 173, or C 138 for each composite sample taken or as directed by the Architect/Engineer.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 05160 - 1 June 3, 2015 UNISTRUT FRAMING SYSTEMS

SECTION 05160 - UNISTRUT FRAMING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE

A. Contractor shall provide and install a surgical light support system(s) for ceiling mounted boom lights. Provide mounting plate suitable for installation of the fixtures indicated. System shall be true, plumb, and level to the tolerances indicated, with no more than 1/720th of the span maximum deflection in either plane, when maximum loading conditions are applied due to equipment operation.


A. Material and installation shall be provided by a qualified vendor, with at least five (5) years experience in the manufacture and installation of adjustable metal framing supports. Vendor shall demonstrate experience of projects of similar scope and size, and shall maintain a continuing quality assurance program for both its material and installation crews.

B. Vendor shall provide the single source responsibility for materials and workmanship, and

shall provide a warranty period of two (2) years from date of acceptance by Architect/Owner.

C. Acceptable Vendors: UNISTRUT CORPORATION and/or its authorized representative.

1.03 SUBMITTAL

A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing the complete system, including plans, sections, and details of the system. Plans shall show all manufactured parts, by catalog numbers, all fabricated parts, and all fasteners and hardware.

B. Manufacturer’s Brochure: Brochure shall show materials, strengths, finishes, and sizes.

Sufficient engineering information shall be provided to permit stress calculations Materials listed should conform to the appropriate specifications from ASTM, AISI, AISC, and/or AWS.

C. Calculations: The medical support system shall lend itself to a rational structural analysis

with section properties of framing members demonstrated by calculations. Structural calculations and drawings shall be prepared by a licensed Florida engineer complying with all applicable codes and regulatory requirements. Submit signed and sealed drawings and calculations for completed design.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.01 MATERIALS

A. Materials used shall conform to the following ASTM specifications:

1. ASTM A446 Grade A.

2. ASTM A570 Grade 33.

3. ASTM A575.

4. ASTM 675 Grade 50.

5. SAE J429 Grade 2.

B. All materials shall be protected from corrosion with a factory-applied finish.

C. All materials shall be stamped and identifiable by manufacturer and part number (where appropriate). Materials that appear damaged, distressed, unidentifiable, or rusted shall not be used and will not be accepted.

2.02 DESIGN

A. Ceiling Anchorage: Whenever possible, attachment to ceiling structure above shall be by means of imbedded concrete inserts, through-bolts, or by direct attachment to the structural framing of the existing building.

B. Vertical Supports: Provide vertical support as determined by Vendor. Vertical supports shall

provide for both basic and micro vertical adjustment.

C. Loading: The support structure shall be designed to support the manufacturers recommendation for the fixtures indicated.

D. Safety Factor: The system shall be designed with a minimum safety factor of 22 based on

ultimate strength under static loading conditions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Field Measurements: The Contractor shall make field measurements to assure that the light support can be installed according to Plans, and without interference with structural framing, mechanical systems, plumbing, or other obstructions. Any interferences shall be reported to the Architect.

B. Sequencing: The Contractor shall assure that the support system is installed in a timely and

practical sequence, ahead of any extensive electrical, mechanical, or HVAC work in the area, and prior to any ceiling framing or room finishes.

C. Painting: All exposed members shall be painted by the painting contractor with paint compatible to

the support systems.

D. Modifications: Any changes or modifications from approved shop drawings shall require approval


from the Architect and shall be noted on the final Drawings. END OF SECTION 05160

Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 05400 - 1 June 3, 2015 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

SECTION 05400 – COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

.1 SUMMARY


1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.

.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product and accessory indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Qualification data.

E. Product test reports.

F. Research/evaluation reports.

.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

C. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions."

1. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."


PART 1 - PRODUCTS

.1 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows:

1. Grade: ST33H minimum and as indicated. 2. Coating: G90 or equivalent.

.2 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch. 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches. 3. Effective Section Properties: As indicated on Drawings

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs.

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Equal to manufacturer's bypass clips indicated, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.

.3 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel headless, hooked bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by mechanically deposition according to ASTM B 695, Class 50.

D. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

E. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.


F. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035.

B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

C. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching.

D. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.

PART 1 - EXECUTION

.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

C. Install framing members in one-piece lengths.

D. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

E. Install insulation, specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

F. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings.

G. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:


1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

.2 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches as indicated.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing studs and anchor to primary building structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable curtain-wall-framing system.

.3 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 05500 - 1 June 3, 2015 METAL FABRICATIONS

SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not

specified in other Sections. 3. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 4. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete not specified in other

Sections. 5. Miscellaneous steel trim 6. Metal ladders. 7. Metal bollards. 8. Pipe guards.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into

concrete or built into unit masonry.


1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, wedge-type inserts and other items indicated to be cast into concrete.

2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items indicated to be built into unit masonry.

3. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel." 4. Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs." 5. Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings." 6. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for metal framing anchors.



A. Structural Performance of Ladders: Provide ladders capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.

B. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Paint products. 2. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.

3. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."



A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2.2 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

2.3 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.


C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads.

D. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels with continuous slot complying with MFMA-3.

1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm). 2. Material: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel,

Grade 33 (Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) coating; 0.108-inch (2.8-mm) nominal thickness.

2.4 NONFERROUS METALS

A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) for bolts and ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M) for nuts, Alloy Group 1 (A1).

D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

1. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

E. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M).

F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).

G. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.

H. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).

I. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M).


J. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.

K. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) and nuts complying with ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

E. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications.

F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

G. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use


connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended

so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.


B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.

1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed.

C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel shapes of sizes indicated with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as indicated. Drill bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings.

D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

2.9 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.

B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span but not less than 8 inches (200 mm), unless otherwise indicated.

C. Hot dip galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.

2.10 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

B. Galvanize plates after fabrication.

C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer.

2.11 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with not less than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.12 METAL LADDERS

A. General:

1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1.


3. Space siderails 18 inches (457 mm) apart, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches (1500 mm)

o.c. with welded or bolted brackets, made from same metal as ladder.

B. Steel Ladders:

1. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch (9.5-by-64-mm) steel flat bars, with eased edges.

2. Rungs: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter steel bars. 3. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 4. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with

aluminum-oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide grout.

5. Galvanize exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners. 6. Prime interior ladders, including brackets and fasteners.

2.13 METAL BOLLARDS

A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe.

1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick steel plate. Grind welds smooth.

2.14 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.15 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below:

1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:

1. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.


2.16 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

B. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended

so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.


B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.

3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.

1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.4 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS

A. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches (75 mm) above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 06105 - 1 June 3, 2015 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY

SECTION 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 2. Plywood backing panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension.

B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.


3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

4. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project:

1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Powder-actuated fasteners. 5. Expansion anchors. 6. Metal framing anchors.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20

for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.


2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in crawl spaces or unexcavated areas.

4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood).

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Framing for raised platforms. 2. Concealed blocking. 3. Plywood backing panels.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:


1. Blocking. 2. Nailers.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species.

C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).

G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when


installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4).

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

C. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

D. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

E. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in Florida Building Code.

F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.


3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 06410 - 1 June 3, 2015 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

SECTION 06410 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY


1. Plastic-laminate cabinets.

2. Plastic-laminate countertops.


1. Division 6 Section “Miscellaneous Carpentry” for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

B. Exposed Surfaces: Exposed portions of cabinets include all surfaces, including edges,

visible when doors and drawers are closed and visible surfaces and visible edges of shelves in open cabinets.

C. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Semi-exposed portions of cabinets include surface behind

opaque doors and drawer fronts, including shelves, dividers, interior faces of cabinet ends, bottoms of countertops, drawer sides, back and bottoms, back face of doors, undersides of bottoms of cabinets perpendicular and adjacent to the toe board, and bottoms of countertops perpendicular and adjacent to base cabinets.

D. Concealed Surfaces: Concealed portions of cabinets include backs, sleepers, stretchers,

and other surfaces not visible after installation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories.


B. Product Data: For hardboard, medium-density fiberboard, particleboard, plywood, high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, solid-surfacing material, fire-retardant-treated materials, cabinet hardware, and accessories.

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.

1. Shop Drawings shall be a minimum 1/4" scale for elevations and 3/4" for cabinet sections. Elevations shall be keyed to Architect’s Drawing. Elevations shall show all exposed cabinet faces. Sections shall be provided for all different cabinet types and shall clearly show the materials and method of construction. Elevations shall be representative of completed Work.

2. Show details full size.

3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.

4. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures and other items installed in architectural woodwork.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts consisting of units or sections of

units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated.

1. Plastic laminates 2. PVC Edge Binding

E. Samples for Verification:

1. Plastic-laminate-clad panel products, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.

2. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.

F. Product Certificates: signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

G. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in AQuality Assurance@ Article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.


A. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production and installation of interior architectural woodwork.

B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with Architectural Woodwork Standards, Edition 1, 2009, for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements.


C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site.


A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in “Project Conditions” Article.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will be maintaining temperature between 60 degrees and 90 degrees F (16 degrees and 32 degrees C), and relative humidity between 43% and 70% during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming and proceed for trimming at Site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.03 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Quality standard for fabrication and products: Architectural Woodwork Standards, premium-grade, unless noted otherwise.

B. Materials:

1. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type meeting NEMA standards and as follows:


a. Thickness shall be 0.050" thick for horizontal usage exposure; 0.042" thick for radius (post) forming; 0.028" thick for vertical usage exposure; 0.020"-thick minimum for cabinet liner, backing, backer, or balance sheet materials.

b. Color, pattern and texture of horizontal and vertical laminates shall be as indicated or selected from manufacturer=s standard colors.

c. Color of cabinet liner and backing, backer, or balance sheet shall be as indicated or selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

2. Wood Blocking: Construction-grade, any species, with no defects affecting strength or utility.

3. Softwood Plywood: APA-rated, A/C, 3/4” thick unless otherwise indicated, shop sanded, DOC PS1.

4. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1.

5. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): Meet or exceed ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. Thickness of 3/4”, unless otherwise indicated.

6. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 -Exterior Glue.

7. Clear Tempered Float Glass for Doors: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3; manufactured by horizontal (roller hearth) process, with exposed edges seamed before tempering, 6 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Plastic-Laminate Cabinets:

1. General: The intent of this Specification is for ALL casework surfaces, exposed, semi-exposed or concealed surfaces (excluding sub-bases) be covered in a laminate material. There shall be no exposed plywood-core surfaces. Contractor at his option may use melamine for interior lining of cabinet boxes and drawers.

a. Vertical-grade laminate is required for the following exposed and semi-exposed surfaces:

1) Vertical surface of cabinet fronts; door fronts and backs, and door edges; drawer fronts and edges; toe boards; top and bottom surfaces and front edge of all shelves' cabinet ends; exposed supports; open cabinets.

b. Horizontal-grade laminate is required for countertop surfaces.

c. Cabinet liner backing, backer, balance grade laminate or melamine is required for the following semi-exposed surfaces:

1) Backs of drawer fronts, interior faces of cabinet ends and cabinets backs and interior faces of cabinet bottoms. Also included are undersides of bottoms of cabinets perpendicular and adjacent to the toe board.

d. Provide backing, backer, or balance grade laminate for semi-exposed surfaces of countertops.

1) Concealed Materials: Any sound, dry solid lumber, plywood or a combination of material, without defects affecting strengths, utility, or stability.

2) Core Material for Plastic Laminates: Particleboard, unless noted otherwise.

3) Style of Face Construction: AWI flush overlay construction.


e. Cabinet Construction:

1) Sides, Dividers, and Bottoms: Not less than 1/2"-thick particleboard.

2) Backers: Not less than 1/2"-thick particleboard.

f. Drawers: Provide box-type construction. Sides, sub-fronts and backs not less than 1/2"-thick particleboard; bottoms not less than 3/4"-thick particleboard or plywood with cabinet liner or melamine applied to all inside surfaces and edges. Rabbet bottom into sub-fronts, backs, and sides and secured with hot-melt glue and/or mechanical fasteners. When dovetail joints are used apply hot-melt glue only. When lock-shouldered joint or dowels are used apply hot-melt glue and nail. Spacing between dowels shall not exceed 2". Drawer fronts shall be screw-fastened to drawer box from the inside.

g. Wall and Base Cabinets: Connect wall cabinet tops and bottoms and base cabinet bottoms and stretchers to ends and dividers by means of mechanical fasteners. Set tops, bottoms, and backs flush with sides, unless otherwise indicated.

h. Sub-Base: Not less than 1"-thick solid wood blocking. Particle-board or plywood shall not be acceptable.

2. Wood Blocking: Construction-grade, any species, with no defects affecting strength or utility. Blocking concealed in walls or partitions shall comply with Section 06105 – Miscellaneous Carpentry.

3. Shelving:

a. All shelves shall be 1"-thick plywood.

b. Apply vertical-grade laminate to the top and bottom surfaces and front edges.

c. Apply cabinet liner or vertical-grade laminate to the sides and back edges.

4. Swinging Doors:

a. Doors up to 30" wide and 60" high shall be 3/4”-thick medium-density fiberboard (MDF). Apply vertical-grade laminate to all surfaces.

b. Doors up to 36" wide and 72" high shall be 1"-thick medium-density fiberboard (MDF). Apply vertical-grade plastic laminate to all surfaces.

5. Edging Materials:

a. 3mm PVC banding, machine-applied with waterproof hot-melt adhesive to external edges and outside corners of door and drawer fronts, machine profiled to1/8” radius for safety.

b. Exposed edges of cabinet fronts, shelving, and dividers shall have a protective 1mm PVC impact/chip/mar-resistant edge. 1mm PVC color shall match body cabinet color and/or 3mm door/drawer edge banding.

c. Barbed T-edging or laminate self-edge on cabinet components shall not be acceptable.

6. Countertops:

a. Underlayment: Particleboard except underlayment shall be plywood within 2’-0” of sink locations.

b. Plastic laminate: Plastic laminate shall meet NEMA standard for vertical and horizontal application.


c. Apply horizontal -grade plastic laminate to the top surface of countertops. Apply vertical-grade plastic laminate to the front and exposed ends of countertops and the top edge and front of backsplashes. Apply vertical-grade laminate or cabinet liner material to the back edge, bottom (underside) and concealed ends of countertops and the bottom edge of backsplashes.

7. Countertop Configuration:

a. Front Style: 3mm PVC banding, machine applied with waterproof hot-melt adhesive to leading edge, machine profiled to 1/8” radius for safety.

b. Backsplash: Square with scribe. Sides shall be square. Thickness shall be 1".

8. Cabinet Hardware:

a. Pulls: AMEROCK No. 978-BN Wire Pull.

b. Hinges: Overlay, self-closing, all metal, 120E opening, independent screw action.

Hinge plate shall be zinc cast, T-type, fully adjustable. Provide recommended number of hinges per door as recommended by the manufacturer based on door dimension.

(i) Product: SALICE 200 full overlay, 120E, snap-on, fully concealed, self-closing

hinges, No. C2P9.

c. Drawer Slides: 100-lbs. capacity, full-extension, Model No. 8405 1” Overtravel

Drawer Slide, as manufactured by KNAPE & VOGT, or approved equal as determined by Architect.

d. Pull-Out Shelf Slides: Model No. 8100, as manufactured by KNAPE & VOGT.

e. Bumpers: Self-adhering molded rubber type, off-white color. Foam or plastic type bumpers are not acceptable. Provide two (2) each for doors and drawers.

f. Grommets: 2" diameter plastic, black or almond in color. Provide one (1) grommet for every four (4) lineal feet of countertop. Provide 3" diameter grommets where indicated.

g. Caulking: Caulking used for casework application shall match the adjacent laminate color and shall be as manufactured by COLOR-RITE, or approved equal.

h. Shelf Clips: Knape & Vogt KV 332 ANO 5mm, steel, flat top shelf supports.

i. Adjustable Wire Dividers: Häfele Model No. 771.80.208 for 5 mm systems.

j. Cabinet Locks: Equal to Schlage CL-Series, keyed individually. Provide 75 cabinet locks, locate as directed.

k. Corner Protection: IPC textured finish surface, tape-on rigid vinyl corner guard, .080” thick. Provide 3/4” x 3/4” in lengths required. Color shall be selected from manufacturer’s standard colors. Provide at all outside corners for all cabinetwork provided under this section.

l. Slide Out Keyboard Tray: Knape and Vogt KD-110. Provide a total of 40 units, locate as directed.

m. Undercounter CPU Holder: CPU 2A Sliding Universal CPU Holder by Doug Mockett and Co., Inc. Provide a total quantity of 40, locate as directed.

n. Wall gusset (knee brace): A & M Hardware, size as required. Finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard finishes.


o. Table Legs: TL Series with standard glide, matte black, 3” diameter and heights as required, by Doug Mockett and Co., Inc.

A. Fabrication:

1. Provide all cutouts required in casework for plumbing items or other equipment.

2. Assemble units in shop in as large components as practical to minimize field cutting and jointing.

3. Seal all cracks and crevices in casework units to prevent movement or infiltration of insects between all parts of cabinets, including bases and countertops using interior sealant.

4. Cut all scribes to within 3/32" to adjacent surfaces. 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install cabinets plumb, level, true and straight. Shim as required using concealed shims. Where casework surface abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings as required. Finish of filler strips, scribe strips and molding shall match cabinet face, unless otherwise indicated to the acceptable to the Architect.

B. Anchor cabinets securely in place with concealed (when door and drawers are closed)

fasteners, anchored into structural support members of wall construction.

C. Attach countertops securely to base units. Spline and glue joints in countertops; provide concealed mechanical clamping of joint using a minimum of two (2) KNAPE & VOGT No.

516 Tite-Joint fasteners, or equal as determined by the Architect. Provide cutouts for fixtures and equipment as indicated; drill pilot holes at corners before making cutouts. Smooth cut edges and coat with waterproof coating.

D. Hardware:

1. Install pulls on all doors and drawers unless indicated otherwise.

2. Install bottom or side-mounted slides on all drawers.

3. Install shelf supports in casework indicated with shelves. Provide 4 supports for each shelf.

4. Install bumpers on backs of drawer fronts and backs of doors.

E. Cleaning and Protection:

1. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed by Architect upon completion of installation.

2. Clean exposed and semi-exposed surfaces, touch up finishes as required and remove and refinish damaged or soiled areas than cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the


Architect.

a. Protection: Maintain conditions necessary to ensure that Work will be without damage or deterioration at time of Final Acceptance.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 07210 - 1 June 3, 2015 Building Insulation

SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Concealed building insulation. 2. Sound attenuation insulation.


1. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for installation in metal-framed assemblies of insulation specified by referencing this Section.

2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of glass fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths) or rolls.


A. Plenum Rating: Provide glass-fiber insulation where indicated in ceiling plenums whose test performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products per "Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or on comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking, flaking, peeling, or delamination of interior surface of duct assembly, after testing for 4 hours at 2500-fpm (13-m/s) air velocity.

2. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold growth, delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity, after inoculation with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 days at 100 percent relative humidity in the dark.


1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for insulation products.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.

C. Recycled Content: Provide glass-fiber insulation with minimum 25% recycled content.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.


2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A. Available Manufacturers:

1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Fiber Glass. 5. Owens Corning.

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. Provide in thickness required to meet the indicated thermal resistance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.


E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 07841 - 1 June 3, 2015 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

SECTION 07841 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.


A. General: For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls including fire walls, fire partitions and fire barriers. 2. Fire-resistance-rated horizontal assemblies including floors, floor/ceiling

assemblies and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies.

B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479:

1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas:

a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.

C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction.


1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems.

2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means.

3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation.

D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-penetration firestop system, along with the following information:

1. Types of penetrating items. 2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where

applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated. 3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop

design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

C. Product Certificates: For through-penetration firestop system products, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article:

1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:


a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the following:

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."


A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop systems.

C. Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of through-penetration firestop system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations.

D. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, through-penetration firestop systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those systems indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 that are produced by one of the following manufacturers:

1. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division.

2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items:

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing

materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves.

2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 by referencing the types of materials described in this Article. Fill materials are


those referred to in directories of referenced testing and inspecting agencies as "fill," "void," or "cavity" materials.

B. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

C. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture.

D. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

E. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet.

F. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.

G. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.

H. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

I. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives.

J. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

K. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below:

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions.

2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces.

3. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces.

2.4 MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate


proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration firestop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.

3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.


B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.

C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of edge of the firestop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. For plastic labels, use self-adhering type with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed and, in combination with label material, will result in partial destruction of label if removal is attempted. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and

inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems


immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.6 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to alpha-alpha-numeric designations listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.

B. Firestop Systems with No Penetrating Items:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-, C-BJ-, F-A-, W-J-, W-L-, 0001-0999. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following:

a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty. d. Mortar.

C. Firestop Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-, C-BJ-, C-BK-, F-A-, F-B-, F-C-, W-J-, W-K-, W-L-, 1001-1999.

2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following:

a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty. d. Mortar.

D. Firestop Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing:

1. Available ]UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-, C-BJ-, F-A-, F-B-, F-C-, W-J-, W-L-, 2001-2999.


a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty. d. Intumescent wrap strips. e. Firestop device.

E. Firestop Systems for Electrical Cables:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-, C-BJ-, F-A-, F-B-, F-C-, W-J-, W-L-, 3001-3999.


a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty.


d. Silicone foam. e. Pillows/bags.

F. Firestop Systems for Insulated Pipes:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-, C-BJ-, F-A-, F-C-, W-J-, W-L-, 5001-5999.


a. Latex sealant. b. Intumescent putty. c. Silicone foam. d. Intumescent wrap strips.

G. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-, F-A-, W-L-, 6001-6999. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following:

a. Latex sealant. b. Intumescent putty. c. Mortar.

H. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-, F-C-, W-J-, W-L-, 7001-7999. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or both of the following:

a. Latex sealant. b. Mortar.

I. Firestop Systems for Groupings of Penetrants:

1. Available UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-, C-BJ-, F-A-, F-C-, W-J-, W-L-, 8001-8999.


a. Latex sealant. b. Mortar. c. Intumescent wrap strips. d. Firestop device. e. Intumescent composite sheet.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 07920 - 1 June 3, 2015 JOINT SEALANTS

SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section:

1. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:

a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. b. Tile control and expansion joints. c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry walls and

partitions. d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors

and windows. e. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. f. Joints between the base of hollow metal door frames and all hard surface

flooring. g. Other joints as indicated

2. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. b. Other joints as indicated.


1. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters of acoustical ceilings.


A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. .

D. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer.

E. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer.

G. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

H. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period preceding the commencement of the Work.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.

3. Test elastomeric joint sealants according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for


adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness.

4. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard specifications and test methods.

5. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.


C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.

3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other

atmospheric contaminants.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference to ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

E. Single-Component Neutral- and Basic-Curing Silicone Sealant. 1. Products:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. GE Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. GE Silicones; SilPruf SCS2000. d. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-641. e. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Omniseal. f. Dow Corning Corporation; 791. g. Dow Corning Corporation; 795


h. GE Silicones; SilPruf NB SCS9000. i. GE Silicones; UltraPruf II SCS2900.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 50. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates

indicated, O.

a. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass,, color anodic aluminum, galvanized steel, and brick..

6. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per ASTM C 1248.

2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.

B. Available Products:

1. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 600. 2. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. 3. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200. 4. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac. 5. Tremco; Tremflex 834.

2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following:

1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

2. Available Products:

a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.


B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), O (open-cell material), B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated], and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:

C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:


1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not

stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.


D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant

application and replace them with dry materials.

E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

F. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that

allow optimum sealant movement capability.

G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that

do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless

otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated

per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193.

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 5 tests for the first 1000 feet (300 mm) of joint length for each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet (300 mm) of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab; Method B, Exposed Surface Finish Hand Pull Tab; or Method C, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Flap; in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 , as appropriate for type of joint-sealant application indicated.


a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; do this by extending cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with specified requirements. Record results in a field-adhesion-test log.

4. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. c. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified

requirements.

5. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.

6. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 08110 - 1 June 3, 2015 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames.

B. Related Sections

1. Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors. 2. Division 9 Sections "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting" for field painting

hollow metal doors and frames. 3. Division 13 Section "Radiation Protection" for lead-lined door frames. 4. Division 16 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for

door controls and operators.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.

B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal

thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal

thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.


5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

C. Other Action Submittals:

1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.

D. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.

1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.

2. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

C. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite.

D. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784

E. Door and frame units indicated for exterior locations shall be designed to comply with the requirements of the High-Velocity Hurricane Zone of the 2007 Florida Building Code with latest revisions. Notice of Acceptance from Miami-Dade Building Code compliance Office or certification from other testing laboratories approved by the State of Florida under the Florida Building Code shall be provided for review. Contractor shall provide all finish hardware specifically required by the NOA of the doors provided in order to maintain the required rating indicated in the NOA.


F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.

1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 2. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 4. Republic Builders Products Compay


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) metallic coating.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.

G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. (96- to 192-kg/cu. m) density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing."

J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb,

polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.


a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated.

b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 4.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (0.704 K x sq. m/W) when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

1) Locations: Exterior doors.

3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard.

4. Vertical Edges for Double-Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch (54-mm) radius.

5. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.

6. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).

C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch- (14 gage) thick steel sheet.

C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.


2. Fabricate frames as face welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (16 gage) thick steel sheet. 4. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch- (16 gage) thick steel sheet. 5. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.053-inch- (16 gage) thick steel sheet. 6. Frames for lead lined Steel Doors: 0.067-inch- (14 gage) thick steel sheet.

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches (50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick.

3. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch (50-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16 mm) high unless otherwise indicated.

C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed.


2.7 LOUVERS

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch- (6.4-mm-thick by 25.4-mm-) wide steel.

C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861.

C. Hollow Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. 3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where

required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.

D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.

2. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.

6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:


a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.

2) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high.

3) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24

inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches (1066 mm) wide

and mounted in metal-stud partitions.

c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches

(152 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c.

7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.

b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861.

2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware.

3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.


4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 16 Sections.

G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing

and type of installation indicated.

2.10 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.


B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:

1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.

C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with HMMA 840.

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.

d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have

been properly set and secured. f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are

constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.


4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout.

5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces.

6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

7. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

8. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members.

9. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch

(1.6 mm). c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5

mm). d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold):

Maximum 3/4 inch (19 mm).

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. from each corner.



A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 08211 - 1 June 3, 2015 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer and medium-density-overlay faces. 2. Shop priming and Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 2. Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" for field finishing doors. 3. Division 13 Section "Radiation Protection" for lead-lined flush wood doors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.

1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work.


2. Frames for light openings, 6 inches (150 mm) long, for each material, type, and finish required.

E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.

B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."

C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252.

1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.

2. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.

C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during the remainder of the construction period.


1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section.

b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span.

2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers:

1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 5. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company. 6. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company. 7. VT Industries Inc.

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.

B. Particleboard-Core Doors:

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to

eliminate through-bolting hardware.

3. Provide doors with either glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.

C. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated.


1. Pairs: Provide formed-steel edges and astragals.

a. Finish steel edges and astragals to match door hardware (locksets or exit devices).

D. Mineral-Core Doors:

1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.

2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.

3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors (Nat):

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces. 2. Species: Select Birch. 3. Cut: Quarter sliced. 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Slip match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening. 7. Exposed Vertical Edges: Applied wood-veneer edges of same species as faces

and covering edges of faces. 8. Core: Particleboard 9. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then

entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. 10. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.

2.4 DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors (PT):

1. Grade: Custom. 2. Faces: Medium-density overlay.

a. Apply medium-density overlay to standard-thickness, closed-grain, hardwood face veneers or directly to high-density hardboard crossbands.

b. Hardboard Faces: AHA A135.4, Class 1 (tempered) or Class 2 (standard). c. MDF Faces: ANSI A208.2, Grade 150 or 160.

3. Exposed Vertical Edges: Any closed-grain hardwood. 4. Core: Particleboard.


5. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering

6. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.

2.5 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES

A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads as follows unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces for veneered face doors. Provide any closed-grain hardwood for doors for opaque finish.

2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads. 3. At wood-core doors with 20-minute fire-protection ratings, provide wood beads

and metal glazing clips approved for such use.

B. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood-veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated.

C. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; factory primed for paint finish; and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors.

C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply

with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing." 3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.


2.7 SHOP PRIMING

A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime doors with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting". Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with primer.

2.8 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Finish doors at factory.

C. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors indicated to receive opaque finish.

D. Finish doors at factory where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished.

E. Transparent Finish for Veneered Faced Doors for Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: WDMA TR-4 conversion varnish or TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Effect: Filled finish. 5. Sheen: Satin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.

1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."


B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges.

3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency.

D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 08710 - 1 June 29, 2015 (2) FINISH HARDWARE

SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY


1) All items known commercially as finish or door hardware.

2) Thresholds, weather-stripping and door seals.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 8 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.” 1.04 REFERENCES

A. BHMA (Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association) Series A156. B. DHI (Door and Hardware Institute) Series A115. C. SDI 107 Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement - Application). D. SDI 109 Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. E. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows. F. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code. G. ADA Americans with Disabilities Act.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Prepare all submittals in accordance with SECTION 01330 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.


1) Schedules - Submit six (6) copies of Finish Hardware Schedule for Architect's approval. Schedules shall include quantity, type, location, finish and manufacturer of each item of hardware for each opening. No material shall be ordered until the submittal is approved. After approval, no substitutions will be allowed without the written consent of Architect.

2) Product Data - Submit two (2) copies of the manufacturer's catalog sheets describing each item of hardware. Templates - Furnish template information, as requested, to the General Contractor for use by related trades.

3) Project Closeout - At completion of Project, furnish one (1) copy of each of the following:

a) Hardware Schedule (as furnished).

b) Key Schedule.

c) Manufacturers Maintenance Instructions.

d) Special tools required for maintaining or adjusting hardware.

e) All manufacturers’ warranties. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturers and products, which are acceptable for use on this Project, are listed in PART 2 of this Specification. Substitutions will not be allowed without prior, written approval of the Architect. Requests for substitutions must be made in writing. Requests must include physical samples and manufacturer’s data for substitute.

B. The hardware supplier shall be a firm specializing in furnishing and servicing of finish hardware and have been engaged in this business for a period of not less than five (5) years. This supplier shall be a factory- authorized, direct distributor for the manufacturer of the products specified. This person shall be available at reasonable times for consultation on this Project.

C. The hardware manufacturer shall be a recognized firm regularly engaged in the manufacture and sale of finish hardware items.

D. As nearly as possible, obtain each type of hardware (hinges, locks, closers, etc) from a single manufacturer.

E. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with the requirements of NFPA 80-1999 and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that have been tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual, Warnock-Hersey, or testing organization acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction.

F. All hardware shall meet the requirements set forth in the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and State and local handicapped codes.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. SECTION 01600 pertaining to transportation, handling and storage of Project materials applies to this Section.


B. Package each item individually. Label and clearly identify each package with item nomenclature and door opening.

C. General Contractor is to provide a secure, locked storage area for all items delivered to Job Site.

D. Hardware Supplier shall receive hardware items in his warehouse and accumulate, mark and schedule delivery to Job Site with the needs of General Contractor.

1.08 SCHEDULING AND COORDINATION

A. General Contractor shall coordinate the Work between hardware supplier and other related suppliers or trades. These items shall include, but not be limited to, templates, wiring diagrams, and riser diagrams.

B. General Contractor shall coordinate a pre-installation meeting between the hardware

supplier, installers and any related trades. This meeting shall be to review of proper installation and adjustment of hardware, with special attention to any unusual materials or applications.

C. WARRANTY

1) All hardware items are to be warranted for a period of one (1) year from date of

Substantial Completion, except door closers shall be warranted for five (5) years.

2) Warranty is to cover failure due to manufacturing defects or material failure only. It shall not cover abuse, vandalism, improper installation or maintenance. Defective materials are to be replaced at no cost to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable products and manufacturers are listed below. No substitutions will be accepted without prior approval. Refer to PART 1 - GENERAL, Paragraph 1.06, subpart A. Specific information regarding functions, sizes, finishes and types are found in the hardware sets at the end of this Section.

1) Hinges:

a) McKinney

b) Hager

c) Stanley

2) Bolts:

a) Sargent


b) Rockwood

c) Ives

d) Hager

3) Locksets:

a) Cylindrical Sets: Sargent 8200 Series with ADA L Lever and 6 pin

conventional core

4) Exit Devices:

a) Von Duprin

5) Door Closers/Door Closers with Hold Open Function:

a) LCN: Designer Series Cover

b) Sargent

6) Overhead Hold Open and Stop:

a) Glynn Johnson

b) Rixson

7) Stops and Holders:

a) Rockwood

b) Ives

c) Hager

8) Thresholds and Weather-stripping:

a) National Guard Products

b) Pemko

c) Hager

9) Push/Pull:

a) Ives

2.02 FASTENERS

A. Furnish all hardware with necessary screws, bolts and other fasteners of suitable size, quantities and type to properly anchor hardware. Exposed fasteners shall match finish of the hardware item.

B. All hardware shall be installed using only the fasteners furnished by the manufacturer.

Installation of items using other than manufacturer-supplied fasteners could result in voiding manufacturer’s warranty.


2.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERN FOR PACKAGING

A. The hardware shipped to the Job Site shall be packaged in biodegradable packs such as paper or cardboard boxes and wrapping. General Contractor will be responsible for the disposal of any non-biodegradable packaging.

2.04 FINISHES

A. Finishes for all items shall be US26D (626), Satin Chromium or equivalent for items listed in the Hardware Schedule at the end of this Section unless noted otherwise.

2.05 KEYING

A. Key system as directed by Owner/Architect. Key alike in sets or differently as directed by Owner/Architect.

1) Provide the following quantities of keys:

a) Master Keys - 6 each.

b) Change Keys per lock - 4 each.

c) Key Control System: Dual tag system with 50% expansion in lockable metal cabinet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Hardware Schedule

A. HARDWARE SET NO. 1: (Dr. No. 101A)

Existing door – change cylinder for keying.

B. HARDWARE SET NO. 2: (Dr. No. 104A)

6 each ............Hinge .................. ......................................... ................................ Exist

2 each ............Surface Bolt ........ ......................................... ................................ Exist

1 each ............Access Control .... KP8276 LNL ..................... US26D ............ (LO-7) SG

1 each ............Overhead Stop .... ......................................... ................................ Exist

1 each ............Closer ................. ......................................... ................................ Exist

1 each ............Threshold ............ ......................................... ................................ Exist

1 each ............Gasketing............ ......................................... ................................ Exist


1 each ............Sweep ................. 315CN 36” ........................ ...................... (SW-1) PM

1 each ............Sweep ................. 315CN 24” ........................ ...................... (SW-2) PM

C. HARDWARE SET NO. 3: (Dr. No. 101B)

3 each ............Hinge .................. TA2714 NRP 4.5 X 4.5 ..... US26D ............. (HI-6) MK

1 each ............Classroom ........... 28 10G37 LP .................... US26D ............ (LO-3) SG

1 each ............Closer ................. 281 PS ............................. EN ...................(CL-3) SG

1 each ............Wall Stop ............ 409 ................................... US32D ............. (ST-1) RK

3 each ............Silencer ............... 608 ................................... ......................... (SI-1) RK

D. HARDWARE SET NO. 4: (Dr. No. 102A)

3 each ............Hinge .................. TA2714 4.5 X 4.5 ............ US26D ............. (HI-1) MK

1 each ............Entry/Office ......... 28 10G05 LP .................... US26D ............ (LO-2) SG

1 each ............Closer ................. 281 O ............................... EN ...................(CL-1) SG



D. HARDWARE SET NO. 5: (Dr. Nos. 113A, 116A, 118A, 119A, 120A, 125A, 129A)



1 each ............Closer ................. 281 UO ............................. EN ...................(CL-2) SG



E. HARDWARE SET NO. 6: (Dr. Nos. 133A, 135A, 136A)


1 each ............Privacy ................ 28 10U65 LP .................... US26D ............ (LO-4) SG

1 each ............Closer ................. 281 O ............................... EN ...................(CL-1) SG

1 each ............Door Stop ............ 441 ................................... US26D ............. (ST-2) RK


F. HARDWARE SET NO. 7: (Dr. Nos. 111A, 114A, 126A, 127A)



1 each ............Passage .............. 28 10U15 LP .................... US26D ............ (LO-5) SG




G. HARDWARE SET NO. 8: (Dr. Nos. 117A, 132A)






H. HARDWARE SET NO. 9: (Dr. Nos. 122A, 123A, 124A)

3 each ............Hinge .................. T2714 4.5 X 4.5............... US26D ............. (HI-2) MK

1 each ............Entry/Office ......... 28 10G05 LP .................... US26D ............ (LO-2) SG



I. HARDWARE SET NO. 10: (Dr. No. 122B)


1 each ............Passage .............. 28 10U15 LP .................... US26D ............ (LO-5) SG


J. HARDWARE SET NO. 11: (Dr. No. 134A)





K. HARDWARE SET NO. 12: (Dr. No. 131A)



1 each ............Storeroom/Clst .... 28 10G04 LP .................... US26D ............ (LO-1) SG

1 each ............Closer ................. 281 PS ............................. EN ...................(CL-3) SG


L. HARDWARE SET NO. 13: (Dr. No. 115A)





1 each ............Gasketing............ S88D 17’ .......................... ....................... (GA-2) PM

M. HARDWARE SET NO. 14: (Dr. Nos. 109A, 111B)

1 each ............Pivot Set ............. L147 ................................. 626 ..................(PV-1) RX

1 each ............Pivot .................... ML19 ................................ 626 ..................(PV-2) RX

1 each ............Hosp. Latch ......... P28 74-Pull 114 ................ US26D ............ (LO-6) SG

1 each ............Closer ................. 281 O (lead line cover) ..... EN ...................(CL-5) SG



N. HARDWARE SET NO. 15: (Dr. No. 110A)

2 each ............Pivot Set ............. L147 ................................. 626 ..................(PV-1) RX

2 each ............Pivot .................... ML19 ................................ 626 ..................(PV-2) RX

1 each ............Flush Bolt ............ 555 ................................... US26D ............ (BO-2) RK

2 each ............Hosp. Latch ......... P28 74-Pull 114 ................ US26D ............ (LO-6) SG

2 each ............Closer ................. 281 O (lead line cover) ..... EN ...................(CL-5) SG



Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 08800 - 1 June 3, 2015 GLAZING

SECTION 08800 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Interior door lites 2. Interior windows


1. Division 13 Section "Radiation Protection" for lead equivalency radiation protection view windows.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas.

D. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.

E. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.

F. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage


and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.


A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria:

C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Samples for glass and of 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples for sealants. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.

C. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Samples for glass.

1. Each color of tinted float glass. 2. Coated vision glass. 3. Each pattern and color of ceramic-coated vision glass. 4. Wired glass. 5. Fire-resistive glazing products. 6. Each type of laminated glass with colored interlayer. 7. Insulating glass for each designation indicated. 8. For each color (except black) of exposed glazing sealant indicated.


D. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.

E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

F. Qualification Data: For installers.

G. Product Test Reports: For each of the following types of glazing products:

1. Tinted float glass. 2. Coated float glass. 3. Insulating glass. 4. Glazing sealants. 5. Glazing gaskets. 6. Impact resistant glazing assemblies. 7. Radiation Protection glass.

H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain the following through one source from a single manufacturer for each glass type: clear float glass, coated float glass, laminated glass, and insulating glass.

C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated.

D. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products.

1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

2. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

E. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period.


1. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

2. Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.

F. Glazing for Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

G. Glazing for Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257.

H. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and, for wired glass, ANSI Z97.1.

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency or manufacturer acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2 articles for glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m) in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m) or less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category I or II materials, except for hazardous locations where Category II materials are required by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

I. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: GANA Laminated Division's "Laminated Glass Design Guide" and GANA's "Glazing Manual."

2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units."

J. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.


B. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by laminated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each glazing product is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3, Class 1 (Clear), Class 2 (Tinted).

B. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Class 1 (Clear), Class 2 (Tinted), Quality-Q3, Kind HS.

C. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Type 1, Class 1 (Clear), Class 2 (Tinted), Quality Q3, Kind FT.


D. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with other requirements specified and with the following:

1. Interlayer: Polyvinyl butyral of thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation.

a. For polyvinyl butyral interlayers, laminate lites in autoclave with heat plus pressure.

2. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets.

2.3 FIRE-RATED GLAZING PRODUCTS

A. Monolithic Ceramic Glazing Material: Proprietary product in the form of clear flat sheets of 3/16-inch (5-mm) nominal thickness weighing 2.5 lb/sq. ft. (12.2 kg/sq. m), and as follows:

1. Fire-Protection Rating: As indicated for the fire window in which glazing material is installed, and permanently labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.4 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:

1. EPDM, ASTM C 864. 2. Silicone, ASTM C 1115. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115. 4. Any material indicated above.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:

1. EPDM. 2. Silicone. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. 4. Any material indicated above.

C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.


2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:

1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

1. Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants:

a. Available Products:

1) Dow Corning Corporation; 790. 2) GE Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. 3) Tremco; Spectrem 1 (Basic).

b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). c. Class: 50. d. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). e. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing

substrates indicated, O.

1) Use O Glazing Substrates: Aluminum coated with a high-performance coating.

C. Glazing Sealants for Impact Glazing Products: Identical to products used in test assemblies to obtain impact rating.

2.6 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper


backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.

2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full

bead of liquid sealant.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire-resistance rating.

2.8 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.


B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with outdoor and indoor faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

2.9 FIRE RATED GLAZING FOR INTERIOR LOCATIONS

A. Basis of Design Product: “Premium FireLIte” (polished on both surfaces) by Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd., and distributed by Technical Glass Products.

2.10 LAMINATED IMPACT RESISTANT VISION GLASS UNITS FOR INTERIOR LOCATIONS:

A. Basis of Design Product: OLDCASTLE 5/16” Laminated Clear Glazing, 1/8” Clear – 0.060” Saflex Clear PVB – 1/8” Clear.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.


C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm) as follows:

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.


C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


3.7 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING

A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system, unless otherwise indicated.

3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 09111 - 1 June 3, 2015 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

SECTION 09111 - NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:

1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.).

2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).


1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses.

2. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall joint systems installed with non-load-bearing steel framing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency.

a. Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor.

2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.12-mm) diameter.

D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

E. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep.

2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). b. Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm).

3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep.


a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).

4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep members designed to reduce sound transmission.

a. Configuration: Asymmetrical.

F. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640-C Drywall Furring System. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.

2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).

C. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm). 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch-

(1.73-mm-) thick, galvanized steel.

D. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). 2. Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm).

E. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.

1. Configuration: Asymmetrical.

F. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: 3/4 inch (19.1 mm).


2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare-steel thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).

3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

G. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.


B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger

inserts that extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.


E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.

3.5 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

1. Space studs as follows:

a. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

b. Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

c. Tile backing panels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum

1/2-inch (12.7-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

2. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

3. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

5. Curved Partitions:


a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.

b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

D. Direct Furring:

1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 09250 - 1 June 3, 2015 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings.


1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for load-bearing steel framing that supports gypsum board.

2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in assemblies that incorporate gypsum board.

3. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall assemblies that incorporate gypsum board.

4. Division 9 Section "Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board.

5. Division 9 painting Sections for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces. 6. Division 13 Section Radiation Protection for lead lined walls.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim accessory indicated.


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.


B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

C. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Install mockups for the following:

a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.

2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.

3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at

time of Substantial Completion.

1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELS, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.


2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. BPB America Inc. b. G-P Gypsum. c. Lafarge North America Inc. d. National Gypsum Company. e. USG Corporation.

B. Regular Type:

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered

C. Type X:

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

D. Type C:

1. Thickness: As required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

E. Flexible Type: Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness.


F. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board.


G. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces.

1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.3 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS

A. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 931/C 931M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard edges.


1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “DensGlass 5/8” Fireguard” sheathing.

2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. b. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.

3. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. Expansion (control) joint. d. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and

removable strip covering slot opening.

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.


C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose

compound.

D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:

1. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer.

E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.

2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."


1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.


3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.

J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Regular Type: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings and Where required for fire-resistance-rated

assembly. 3. Type C: Where required for specific fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 4. Flexible Type: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies. 5. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 6. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: Install in all patient and public toilet rooms

(except where ceramic tile is indicates), soiled utility rooms, and housekeeping/janitor closets.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.


b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches (400 mm) minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

E. Curved Surfaces:

1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch- (300-mm-) long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them.

2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches (300 mm) o.c.

3.4 APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS

A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports.

1. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations.

2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.


3.5 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile.

B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.

D. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire resistance rated assemblies..

2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 5: At all panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise

indicated.


E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board.

F. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 09310 - 1 June 3, 2015 CERAMIC TILE

SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Ceramic wall tile.


1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for monolithic slab finishes specified for tile substrates.

2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces.

3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for cementitious backer units.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint width indicated.

B. Facial Dimension: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499).

C. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification:


1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.

2. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required, at least 12 inches (300 mm) square and mounted on rigid panel. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed work.

3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required.

E. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer.

F. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.

G. Qualification Data: For Installer.

H. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product.


A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile of same type and color or finish.

1. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product:

1. Joint sealants. 2. Cementitious backer units.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.


D. Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and protected from freezing.

E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each tile type is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. Architect will be sole judge in determining equivalency of products provided in lieu of named product.

2. Product named: Where a single product is named for use, use indicated product, no substitutions or equals allowed.

2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.


2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in Part 1 "Definitions" Article.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials" Article.

C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements:

1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

E. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Floor Tile CT (12” x 12”) as follows:

a. Product: DALTILE, Heathland – Raffia HL02.

b. Use epoxy grout.

B. Base Tile CT1 (12” x 12”) as follows:


b. Use epoxy grout.

C. Base Tile CT2 (4” x 12” Floor Border) as follows:

a. Basis-of-Design Product: DALTILE, Heathland – Sunset HL08.

b. Use polymer-modified grout.

D. Wall Tile CT1 (12” x 12”) as follows:



E. Wall Tile CT2 (2” x 2” Mosaic) as follows:

a. Basis-of-Design Product: DALTILE, Heathland – Sunset Blend HL08.



2.4 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Bonsal, W.R., Company. 2. Bostik. 3. Custom Building Products. 4. DAP, Inc. 5. LATICRETE International Inc. 6. MAPEI Corporation. 7. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. 8. Summitville Tiles, Inc.

B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following:

1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive to which only water must be added at Project site.

a. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F-4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

C. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, color as indicated.

1. Polymer Type: Ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients.

2. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix.

3. Polymer Type: Either ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients, or acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix.

D. Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3, color as indicated.

1. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 deg F (60 deg C) and 212 deg F (100 deg C), respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use.

2.5 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints, unless otherwise indicated.


C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.

1. Products:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. b. GE Silicones; Sanitary 1700. c. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. d. Tremco, Inc.; Tremsil 600 White.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or appearance of grout.

1. Products:

a. Bonsal, W. R., Company; Grout Sealer. b. Bostik; CeramaSeal Grout Sealer. c. C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978. d. Custom Building Products; Surfaceguard Grout Sealer. e. MAPEI Corporation; KER 004, Keraseal Penetrating Sealer for Unglazed

Grout and Tile. f. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Silicone Grout Sealer. g. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile

Sealer.

2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile.

3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.

B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards.

1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.



A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7

Section "Joint Sealants."

H. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards: 1. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6.

3.4 WATERPROOFING AND CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.

B. Install crack-suppression membrane to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.

C. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight.


3.5 WALL TILE INSTALLATION

A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Wall Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting-bed standards.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

2. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains.

B. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.

C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 09511 - 1 June 3, 2015 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.

B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AC: Articulation Class.

B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.

C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.

D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.

2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples of each type, finish, and color.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each acoustical panel ceiling.

D. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.



A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an NVLAP-accredited laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated. NVLAP-accredited laboratories must document accreditation, based on a "Certificate of Accreditation" and a "Scope of Accreditation" listing the test methods specified.

B. Source Limitations:

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.

2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.


A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.


1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.

2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches (400 mm) away from test surface per ASTM E 795.

B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.

1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.

C. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.

D. Antimicrobial Fungicide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels with face and back surfaces coated with antimicrobial treatment consisting of manufacturer's standard formulation with fungicide added to inhibit growth of mold and mildew and showing no mold or mildew growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.


2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING (ACT1)

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong Fine Fissured, No. 1728, Square Edge Lay-in, 24” X 24” X 5/8” with 15/16” exposed tee grid.

B. Color: White.

C. Edge/Joint Detail: Square.

D. Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm).

E. NRC: 0.55

F. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm).

2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.

B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

a. Type: Postinstalled expansion, Postinstalled bonded anchors. b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with

ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition.

2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:


1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.

E. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with 0.04-inch- (1-mm-) thick, galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) diameter bolts.

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING (Suspension Systems for Suspended Ceiling Assembly Designation ACT1)

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong Prelude Plus XL Fire Guard 15/16” exposed Tee system with Armstrong WH white finish, intermediate duty system.

2.5 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners, unless otherwise indicated.

2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.

2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:

a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:

a. OSI Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC-175 Rubber Base Sound Sealant.


b. Pecora Corporation; BA-98. c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

4. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

5. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

6. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are


secure and appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

7. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.

8. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

9. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 10. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 11. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member

supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member.

12. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.

1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:

a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. b. Install panels in a basket-weave pattern.

2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings.

3. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.


3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 09651 - 1 June 3, 2015 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE

SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl composition tile (VCT).

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base,

reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor tile.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.

C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient floor tile required.

D. Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-exposure behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification (CRF): Not less than the following rating per ASTM E 648.

2. Flame Spread: Not more than 25 per ASTM E 84.

3. Smoke Developed: Not more than 450 per ASTM E 84.

4. Smoke Density: Not more than 450 per ASTM E 662.



A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store tiles on flat surfaces.


A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After post-installation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.

E. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


2.2 COLORS AND PATTERNS

A. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range.


2.3 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE

A. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): ASTM F 1066. 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Excelon Companion Square/Standard Excelon

Imperial Texture.

B. Class: 2 (through-pattern tile).

C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.

D. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

E. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm).

F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648.

G. Feature/Tile Strips: Armstrong Excelon Feature Tile, Feature Strips.

2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products.


B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

3. Moisture Testing:

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.

b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.

E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 TILE INSTALLATION

A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles square with room axis unless pattern is indicated.

B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction.

C. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings.


D. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.

E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, non-staining marking device.

F. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of tile installed on covers. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

G. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer.

B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.

1. Apply protective floor polish to horizontal surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer.

a. Use commercially available product acceptable to manufacturer. b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.

2. Cover products installed on horizontal surfaces with un-dyed, untreated building paper until Substantial Completion.

3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or plywood panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 09652 - 1 June 3, 2015 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING

SECTION 09652 - RESILIENT PLANK FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Vinyl plank floor covering, without backing.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient base,

reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts, locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

1. Show details of special patterns.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor covering indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch (150-by-230-mm) sections of each different color and pattern of floor covering required.

E. Product Schedule: For floor coverings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

G. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor covering to include in maintenance manuals.



A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation and seaming method indicated.

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by floor covering manufacturer for installation techniques required.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.


A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store rolls upright.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C), in spaces to receive floor coverings during the following time periods:


B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.

E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed to the largest extent practicable.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.


1. Floor Covering: Furnish quantity not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each color, pattern, and type of floor covering installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VINYL PLANK FLOOR COVERING (VP)

A. Product: Provide Karndean commercial vinyl plank flooring – no substitutions or equals allowed.

B. Colors and Patterns: Van Gogh VGW49T Rimu.

C. Size: 7”x48”


A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor covering and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of not more than60 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories:

1. Cove Strip: 1-inch (25-mm) radius provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer.

2. Cap Strip: Square vinyl, or rubber cap provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer.

3. Corners: Metal inside and outside corners and end stops provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer.

D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of floor coverings, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of floor coverings.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

1. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation.

3.3 FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings.

B. Unroll floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.

C. Lay out floor coverings as follows:

1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas,

at least 6 inches (152 mm) away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams.


D. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

G. Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of floor coverings installed on covers and adjoining floor covering. Tightly adhere floor covering edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

H. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor coverings.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 09653 - 1 June 3, 2015 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES

SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base.


1. Division 9 Sections for resilient floor coverings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C).



A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:


B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT BASE (RB)

A. Resilient Base:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johnsonite.

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.

1. Material Requirement: Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous) or Group II (layered). 3. Style: Cove (base with toe).

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm).

E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches (1219 mm) long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.


F. Outside Corners: Preformed.

G. Inside Corners: Job formed.

H. Colors and Patterns: As indicated.

2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY

A. Resilient Molding Accessory:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. b. Flexco, Inc. c. Johnsonite. d. Roppe Corporation, USA.

B. Description: Cap for carpet base, Reducer strip for resilient floor covering, Joiner for tile and carpet Transition strips.

C. Material: Rubber.

D. Profile and Dimensions:

E. Tile/Carpet Transition: Roppe No. 61, rubber.

F. Reducer Strip – 1/8” to 0.080”: Roppe No. 59, rubber.

G. Glue-Down Carpet Edge, 5/16”: Roppe No. 39, rubber.

H. Glue-Down Carpet Edge, 9/32”: Roppe No. 40, rubber.

I. Reducer Strip – 1/8” Butting Gauge (seamless flooring to vinyl composition tile): Roppe No. 45, rubber.

J. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.


A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):


a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.


F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

H. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply two coat(s).

E. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 09960 - 1 June 26, 2015 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

SECTION 09960 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance coating systems on the following substrates:

1. Interior Substrates:

a. Gypsum board.


1. Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrications” for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section.

2. Division 7 Section “Intumescent Spray Fireproofing” for priming of exposed steel substrates indicated to intumescent spray fire proofing and high performance coating.

3. Division 8 Section “Steel Doors and Frames” for steel door frames prepared with shop applied primer that will be top coated with coatings specified in this Section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat product indicated.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of finish coat indicated.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 4 inches (100 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated. Cross-reference products to coating system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.



A. Master Painters Institute (MPI) Standards:

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List."

2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and coating systems indicated.

B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating and substrate.

a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 25 sq. ft. (2.7 sq. m).

b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated.

3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.


1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.

B. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:

1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing 1 or more benzene rings).

2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:

a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. c. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. l. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. o. Hexavalent chromium. p. Isophorone. q. Lead. r. Mercury.


s. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. u. Methylene chloride. v. Naphthalene. w. Toluene (methylbenzene). x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. y. Vinyl chloride.

C. Colors: Colors to be made to match existing surfaces in project area..

2.2 EPOXY COATINGS

A. Water-Based 2 Part Epoxy (Interior) Semi-Gloss:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Coronado, Coropoxy, waterborne acrylic epoxy, Igloo, Base 1138-1A, L-18, C-3, I-1/2. 1138-250B gloss converter.

2. VOC Content: Minimum E Range of E1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

a. Concrete: 12 percent. b. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

3. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

4. Coating application indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.


B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating.

1. After completing coating operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers skilled in the trades involved.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce coating systems indicated.

D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale.

1. Clean using methods recommended in writing by coating manufacturer. 2. Blast clean according to SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near-White Blast Cleaning."

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed

surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks.


A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when coatings are being applied:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.


2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with specified requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show

materials being used do not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE

A. Provide high performance coatings on exposed steel substrates, including exposed structural steel indicated to receive intumescent spray fire proofing and exposed miscellaneous metal framing:

1. Water-Based Epoxy Coating System:

a. Prime Coat: Rust-inhibitive primer (water based), MPI #79. b. Intermediate Coat: Water-based epoxy, MPI #215. c. Topcoat: Water-based epoxy (interior), MPI #215.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 09912 - 1 June 3, 2015 PAINTING

SECTION 09912 - PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces.

1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.

B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.

1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish.

C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.

1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:

a. Architectural woodwork. b. Acoustical wall panels. c. Plastic-laminate toilet enclosures. d. Plastic-laminate lockers. e. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. f. Light fixtures.

2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Furred areas. b. Ceiling plenums. c. Duct shafts.

3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:


a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Copper and copper alloys. e. Bronze and brass.

4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:

a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts.

5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

D. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal. 3. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for factory priming steel doors and

frames. 4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation of

gypsum board.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.

1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter.

2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated.

1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.


B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat material indicated.

1. After color selection, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated.

C. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.

1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.

2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application.

3. Submit four Samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and texture only:

a. Concrete: 4-inch- (100-mm-) square. Samples for each color and finish. b. Stained or Natural Wood: 4-by-8-inch (100-by-200-mm). Samples of

natural- or stained-wood finish on representative white oak. surfaces. c. Ferrous Metal: 3-inch- (75-mm-) square Samples of flat metal and 6-inch-

(150-mm-)-long samples of solid metal for each color and finish.

D. Qualification Data: For Applicator.


A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals.

1. Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating and substrate.

a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface.

a. After finishes are accepted, Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature.


3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:

1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.


A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).

B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F (7 and 35 deg C).

C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.

1. Quantity: Furnish Owner with an additional 3 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore). 2. Coronado Paint Company (Coronado). 3. ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI Dulux Paints). 4. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). 5. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams).

2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.

1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.

C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

D. Exterior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated rust-inhibitive metal primer for exterior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).

2. Coronado; 35-147 Rust Scat Alkyd Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).

3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160-XXXX Devguard Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).

4. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-712 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm).


5. Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6/B50WZ1: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm).

E. Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No. M04: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).

2. Coronado; 36-11 Rust Scat Latex Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm).

3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160-XXXX Devguard Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).

4. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm).

5. Sherwin-Williams; Galvite HS Paint B50WZ3: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).

F. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer No. 253: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm).

2. Coronado; 40-11 Super Kote 5000 Latex Primer-Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm).

3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1000-1200 Dulux Ultra Basecoat Interior Latex Wall Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm).

4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm).

5. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm).

G. Interior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkyd-based metal primer.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).

2. Coronado; 35-147 Rust Scat Alkyd Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).

3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4130-6130 Devshield Rust Penetrating Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils (0.056 mm).

4. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).

5. Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6/B50WZ1: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm).


2.3 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS

A. Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Concrete, Masonry, and Wood: Factory-formulated full-gloss waterborne acrylic-latex enamel for exterior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel M28: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).

2. Coronado; 414 Super Kote 5000 Acrylic Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).

3. ICI Dulux Paints; 3028-XXXX Dulux Interior/Exterior Acrylic Gloss Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm).

4. Pittsburgh Paints; 90 Line Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior High Performance Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm).

5. Sherwin-Williams; DTM Acrylic Coating Gloss (Waterborne) B66W100 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.4 mils (0.061 mm).

B. Exterior Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Factory-formulated full-gloss alkyd enamel for exterior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Urethane Alkyd Enamel M22: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).

2. Coronado; 1223 Line Super Kote 5000 High Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).

3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4308-XXXX Devguard Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).

4. Pittsburgh Paints; 7-814 Pittsburgh Paints Industrial Gloss-Oil Interior/Exterior Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).

5. Sherwin-Williams; Industrial Enamel B-54 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).

2.4 INTERIOR FINISH COATS

A. Interior Eggshell Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss acrylic-latex enamel for interior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 276: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm).

2. Coronado; 32-Line Super Kote 5000 Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm).

3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1406-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi-Gloss Interior Wall & Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).

4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-500 Series SpeedHide Interior Semi-Gloss Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm).

5. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel B31W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm).


B. Interior Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel for Metal Surfaces: Factory-formulated full-gloss alkyd interior enamel.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Urethane Alkyd Enamel No. M22: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).

2. Coronado; 1223 Line Super Kote 5000 High Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils (0.043 mm).

3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4308-XXXX Devguard Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm).

4. Pittsburgh Paints; 7-814 Series Pittsburgh Paints Industrial Gloss-Oil Interior/Exterior Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).

5. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Alkyd Gloss Enamel B35W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm).

2.5 INTERIOR WOOD STAINS AND VARNISHES

A. Open-Grain Wood Filler: Factory-formulated paste wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.

1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Paste Wood Filler No. 238. 2. Coronado; none required. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; none required. 4. Pittsburgh Paints; none required. 5. Sherwin-Williams; Sher-Wood Fast-Dry Filler.

B. Interior Wood Stain: Factory-formulated alkyd-based penetrating wood stain for interior application applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.

1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Penetrating Stain No. 234. 2. Coronado; 3601-Line Quick-Seal Alkyd Stain. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1700-XXX WoodPride Interior Solventborne Wood Finishing

Stain. 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-560 Rez Interior Semi-Transparent Oil Stain. 5. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Interior Oil Stain A-48 Series.

C. Clear Sanding Sealer: Factory-formulated fast-drying alkyd-based clear wood sealer applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick-Dry Sanding Sealer No. 413.

2. Coronado; 81-10 Dual Seal. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1902-0000 WoodPride Interior Satin Polyurethane Varnish. 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-10 SpeedHide Quick-Drying Interior Sanding Wood Sealer

and Finish. 5. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Fast Dry Sanding Sealer B26V43.

D. Interior Alkyd- or Polyurethane-Based Clear Satin Varnish: Factory-formulated alkyd- or polyurethane-based clear varnish.


1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Interior Wood Finishes Polyurethane Finishes Low Lustre No. 435.

2. Coronado; 67-100 Polyurethane Liquid Plastic Satin Varnish. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1902-0000 WoodPride Interior Satin Polyurethane Varnish. 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-7 Rez Varnish, Interior Satin Oil Clear. 5. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Fast Dry Oil Varnish, Satin A66-300 Series.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application.

1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.

2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area.

B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.

1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.

B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.

1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.


2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.

a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.

b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.

a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.

c. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.

4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations.

a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3.

b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming.

c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat.

5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.

D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.


2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.

3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules.

2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.

3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in

fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.

5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles.

7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.

9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior.

10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.

2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.


3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted.

2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.

3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.

D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.

E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.

F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Uninsulated metal piping. 2. Uninsulated plastic piping. 3. Pipe hangers and supports. 4. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. 5. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets

and outlets. 6. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable

jacket material. 7. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting.

G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Switchgear. 2. Panelboards. 3. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting.

H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.

I. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not


been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.

1. Provide satin finish for final coats.

L. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.

M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.


A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:

1. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of Contractor.

2. Owner may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the noncomplying paint. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove noncomplying paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site.

1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.


3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.

1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.

3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal (all surfaces except exposed structural framing). See Section 09960 “High-Performance Coatings for Exposed Structural Framing.” Primer is not required on shop-primed items.

1. Full-Gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer.

a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss alkyd enamel.

3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces:

1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.

B. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal.

1. Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel.

C. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over interior zinc-coated metal surfaces:

1. Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel.


D. Gypsum Wall Board: Provide the following finish system over gypsum wall board surfaces adjacent to and behind behind plumbing fixtures, including but not limited to sinks, water closets, and lavatories.

1. Moderate Environment (Semi-gloss Finish): One finish coat over and intermedi-ate coat and primer.

a. Primer: Acrylic or epoxy primer, as recommended by manufacturer for this sub-

strate applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.

1) Carboline 2) DuPont: 25P High Solids Epoxy Mastic 3) ICI: True-Glaze WB 4406 Waterborne Epoxy Semi-gloss Coating

(128xx). 4) S-W: Heavy Duty Epoxy B67W300 Series/B60V3 5) Tnemec: Series 151 Elasto-Grip Waterborne Polymide Epoxy

b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy applied at a spreading rate recommended by manu-

facturer to achieve a dry film thickness of 1.5 – 6.0 mils (0.038 to 0.152mm).

1) DuPont: 25P High Solids Epoxy Mastic 2) ICI: Tru-Glaze WB 4406 Waterborne Epoxy Semi-gloss Coating (128XX) 3) S-W: Epolon II Multi-Mil Epoxy Series B62V800 4) Tnemec: Series 29 Tuf-Cryl Water Based Acrylic Emulsion.

c. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy applied at a spreading rate recommended by manu-

facturer to achieve a dry film thickness of 1.5 – 6.0 mils (0.038 to 0.152mm).

1) DuPont: 25P High Solids Epoxy Mastic 2) ICI: Tru-Glaze WB 4406 Waterborne Epoxy Semi-gloss Coating (128XX) 3) S-W: Epolon II Multi-Mil Epoxy Series B62V800 4) Tnemec: Series 29 Tuf-Cryl Water Based Acrylic Emulsion.

E. Concrete Floors: a. First Coat: Moisture curing urethane.

1) S-W: Rexthane heavy duty (reduced).

b. Second and Third coats:

1) S-W: Rexthane heavy duty colored coating(full strength).


3.9 INTERIOR STAIN AND NATURAL-FINISH WOODWORK SCHEDULE

A. Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over new interior woodwork:

1. Alkyd-Based Stain Satin-Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of alkyd-based clear satin varnish over a sealer coat and interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain.

a. Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler. b. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain. c. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer. d. Finish Coats: Interior alkyd- or polyurethane-based clear satin varnish.

B. Natural-Finish Woodwork: Provide the following natural finishes over new interior woodwork:

1. Alkyd-Based Satin-Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of alkyd-based clear satin varnish over a sanding sealer. Provide wood filler on open-grain wood before applying first varnish coat.

a. Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler. b. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer. c. Finish Coats: Interior alkyd- or polyurethane-based clear satin varnish.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 10265 - 1 June 3, 2015 IMPACT RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION

SECTION 10265 - IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Corner guards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, fire-test-response characteristics, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact-resistant wall-protection unit.

B. Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall-protection unit showing locations and extent. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall-protection unit indicated.

1. Include similar Samples of accent strips and accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. (Include Samples of accent strips to verify color selected.)

1. Corner Guards: 12 inches (300 mm) long. Include examples of joinery, corners, end caps, top caps, and field splices.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer.

F. Material Test Reports: For each impact-resistant plastic material.


G. Material Certificates: For each impact-resistant plastic material, signed by manufacturer.

H. Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant wall-protection unit to include in maintenance manuals.

1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining optimum condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to plastic finishes and performance.

I. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall-protection units through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of impact-resistant wall-protection units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall-protection units with surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Store impact-resistant wall-protection units in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) during the period plastic materials are stored.

2. Keep plastic sheet material out of direct sunlight.


3. Store plastic wall-protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C).

a. Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position. b. Store wall-guard, bed-locator, and handrail covers in a horizontal position.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall-protection units until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F (21 deg C) for not less than 72 hours before beginning installation and for the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, and other construction contiguous with impact-resistant wall-protection units by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of impact-resistant wall-protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures. b. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use.


1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Wall Guard and Handrail Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of each type, color, and texture of units installed, but no fewer than two, 8-foot- (2.4-m-) long units.

2. Bed-Locator Covers: Full-size plastic covers equal to 2 percent of each type, color, and texture of units installed, but no fewer than 2 units.

3. Corner-Guard Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of each type, color, and texture of units installed, but no fewer than two, 4-foot- (1.2-m-) long units.

B. Include mounting and accessory components. Replacement materials shall be from same production run as installed units.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each impact-resistant wall-protection unit is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Extruded Rigid Plastic: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout; thickness as indicated.

1. Impact Resistance: Minimum 25.4 ft-lbf/in. (1356 J/m) of notch when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A.

2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 543. 3. Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635. 4. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 5. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Plastic Sheet Wall Covering Material: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, semirigid, high-impact-resistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic sheet with integral color throughout; thickness as indicated.

1. Impact Resistance: Minimum 25.4 ft-lbf/in. (1356 J/m) of notch when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A.

2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 543. 3. Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635. 4. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 5. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

C. Polycarbonate Plastic Sheet: ASTM D 6098, S-PC01, Class 1 or 2, abrasion resistant; with a minimum impact-resistance rating of 15 ft-lbf/in. (800 J/m) of notch when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A.

D. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated but with not less than strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) for Alloy 6063-T5.

E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M.

F. Brass: ASTM B 249/B 249M for extruded shapes and ASTM B 36/B 36 M for sheet.


G. Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated, free of appearance defects, and selected for compatible grain and color.

H. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where exposed to view.

I. Adhesive: Type recommended by manufacturer for use with material being adhered to substrate indicated.

2.3 CORNER GUARDS

A. Surface-Mounted, Resilient, Plastic Corner Guards: Assembly consisting of snap-on plastic cover installed over continuous retainer; including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Koroseal Wall Protection Systems, “Korogard” G100 Series Corner Guard mounted over continuous retainer with end caps top and bottom or a comparable product by one of the following:

2. Manufacturers:

a. Balco, Inc. b. Construction Specialties, Inc. c. Pawling Corporation.

3. Dimensions:

a. Leg Length: 2 inches (50.8mm) b. Angle: 90 degrees or 135 degrees as required. c. Vertical Length of Corner Guard: 84 inches (2134mm)

4. Fire Rating: Class I/A in accordance with ASTM E84.

5. Profile: High-impact vinyl acrylic extrusion locked in place nominal 0.078 inches (1.98 mm) thick.

6. Extrusion: Pebble grain finish with EPA-registered Micro-Chek antimicrobial agent.

7. Retainer: Continuous retainer along entire length of corner guard, minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, 1-piece, extruded 6063-T6 aluminum.

8. Top and Bottom Caps: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color and texture

matching cover; field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.


2.4 END-WALL GUARDS

A. Surface-Mounted, Resilient, Plastic End-Wall Guard: Assembly consisting of snap-on plastic cover installed over continuous retainer at each corner, with end of wall covered by semi-rigid, impact-resistant sheet wall covering; including mounting hardware.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Koroseal Wall Protection Systems, “Korogard” G110 Series Corner Guard mounted over continuous retainer with end caps top and bottom or a comparable product by one of the following:

2. Manufacturers:

a. Balco, Inc. b. Construction Specialties, Inc. c. Pawling Corporation.

3. Dimensions:

a. Leg Length: 2 inches (50.8mm) b. Angle: 90 degrees or 135 degrees as required. c. Vertical Length of Corner Guard: 84 inches (2134mm)

4. Fire Rating: Class I/A in accordance with ASTM E84.

5. Profile: High-impact vinyl acrylic extrusion locked in place nominal 0.078 inches (1.98 mm) thick.

6. Extrusion: Pebble grain finish with EPA-registered Micro-Chek antimicrobial agent.

7. Retainer: Continuous retainer along entire length of corner guard, minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, 1-piece, extruded 6063-T6 aluminum.

8. Top and Bottom Caps: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color and texture

matching cover; field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate impact-resistant wall-protection units to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.

B. Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.

C. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall-protection system components.

B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install impact-resistant wall-protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.

1. Install impact-resistant wall-protection units in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, at heights indicated below:

a. Wall Guards: 2’-10 -1/2” above finished floor.

2. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete installation.

a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads. b. Adjust end and top caps as required to ensure tight seams.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent.

B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer.

Tentant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 10522 - 1 June 26, 2015 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire protection cabinets for the following:

a. Portable fire extinguishers.


1. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguishers."

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets.

1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.

2. Show location of knockouts for hose valves.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fire protection cabinet indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Size: 6 by 6 inches (150 by 150 mm) square.

E. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.



A. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire hoses, hose valves, and hose racks indicated are accommodated.

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

B. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear).

2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET FEC

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group; Ambassador 1015 Fire Extinguisher Cabinet.

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.

C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet.

1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.

D. Fully Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box fully recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge.

1. Flat trim with 1 1/2” return trim.


E. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet.

F. Door Material: Steel sheet.

G. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame.

H. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).

I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.

J. Accessories:

1. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle.

2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated.

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."

1) Location: Applied to cabinet glazing. 2) Application Process: Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters. 3) Lettering Color: Red. 4) Orientation: Vertical.

K. Finishes:

1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following:

a. Exterior of cabinet, door, and trim except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish.

b. Interior of cabinet and door.

2. Steel: Baked enamel or powder coat.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 4. Install door locks at factory.


B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.

2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged. 3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.

2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.5 STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning" or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling".

B. Factory Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).

1. Color and Gloss: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights indicated below:

1. Fire Protection Cabinets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of cabinet.

B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

C. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated.


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.

E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 10523 - 1 June 26, 2015 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

SECTION 10523 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.


1. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets."

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.


1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide J.L. Industries Cosmic 10 E, 4-A: 60-B:C, 10 Pound Multi-Purpose Fire Extinguisher or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.

2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container (FEC): UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb (4.5-kg) nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.

C. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

a. Orientation: Vertical.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.


1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Cabinets: Mount 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher cabinet.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 10801 - 1 June 26, 2015 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Staff and Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Custodial accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:

1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in

other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty.

B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. 2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.

C. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.


B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Brass: ASTM B 19 flat products; ASTM B 16 (ASTM B 16M), rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.

C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.0359-inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness.

D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 (Z180) hot-dip zinc coating.

E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).

H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

I. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.

2.2 WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation.


B. Toilet Tissue Dispenser.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: ASI 7305-2B

C. Paper Towel Dispenser.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: ASI 0245-SS

D. Waste Receptacle:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: ASI 0828

E. Soap Dispenser.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: ASI 20365

F. Mirror: Contractor furnished and installed. See Section 01210-Allowances for mirror allowance.

G. Grab Bar:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: ASI 3700 Series, Type 01, Size As Indicated

2.3 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation.

B. Utility Shelf:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: ASI 0692 2. Description: With exposed edges turned down not less than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm)

and supported by two triangular brackets welded to shelf underside. 3. Size: 24 inches (1219 mm) long by 8 inches (203 mm) deep.

C. Mop and Broom Holder:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: ASI 8215-4

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.


B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to method in ASTM F 446.


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORY SCHEDULE

A. Set No. 1 (Toilet Rooms No. 132, 133, 134, 135, 136)

� 1 Each Toilet Tissue Dispenser � 1 Each Paper Towel Dispenser � 1 Each Waste Receptacle � 1 Each Framed Mirror Unit � 1 Each Soap Dispenser � 1 Each Grab Bar (48”) � 1 Each Grab Bar (36”)

B. Set No. 2 (Janitor 131)

� 1 Each Utility Shelf � 1 Each Mop and Broom Holder

C. Set No. 3 (All sink locations not otherwise indicated above)

� 1 Each Paper Tower Dispenser � 1 Each Soap Dispenser

Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. 13090 - 1 June 3, 2015 RADIATION PROTECTION

SECTION 13090 - RADIATION PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide radiation shielding and radiation protection work for radiology and radiotherapy functions.


1. Division 08 Section “Glazing” for windows and door lites in protected walls

2. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors for doors in protected walls

3. Division 08 Section “Steel Doors and Frames for door and window frames in protected walls.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit for approval Shop Drawings, Product Data, Warranty, Test Reports, and Maintenance Data.


A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three (3) years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer=s instructions.

B. Coordinate with Owner and obtain information on radiation levels expected to be produced

by Owner=s equipment to determine thickness of lead and type of shielding required. 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide radiation shielding and radiation protection by one of the following:

1. A&L SHIELDING

2. RADIATION PROTECTION PRODUCTS, INC.

3. RAY-BAR ENGINEERING CORPORATION.

4. AMERAY COMPANY.


2.02 MATERIALS

A. Lead-Lined Gypsum Wallboard and Accessories:

1. Single, unpierced sheet lead laminated to e@-thick gypsum wallboard; lead thickness minimum 2.0 mm.

2. Fasteners: use wallboard screws along with manufacturer=s standard lead protection device for covering head.

3. Lead Tabs: Not less than f@ diameter, thickness same as lead sheet on gypsum board.

4. Lead Strips: Required at joints for all lead thicknesses equal to or greater than (2.00 mm); thickness same as lead sheet on gypsum board.

B. Lead-Lined Wood Doors:

1. Fabricate doors of solid-core flush construction with one or more continuous unpierced lead sheets to make up total lead thickness. Lead thickness shall be minimum 2.0 mm. Apply lead sheet continuously from top to bottom and edge to edge. Lead lining may be constructed within core or between core and cross banding at manufacturer=s option.

2. Shield cutouts for locksets with sheet lead lapping lead lining of locksets and door lining, of equivalent thickness to that used in door. Face veneer shall match doors as specified in SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS.

C. Lead-Lined Door Frames: 14-gauge cold-rolled steel welded for structural strength, as

specified in SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES. Lead thickness shall be equivalent to lead thickness in doors. Lead lining to be applied to all surfaces in the frame requiring shielding as determined by swing of door and location of lead in walls of room.

D. Finish Hardware: As specified in SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE. Line with lead

as required.

E. Lead Glass View Window: Fixed design glass view window without voice passage and with removable stop beads and lead glass. Frame with hollow metal 14-gauge cold-rolled steel with factory prime paint for field paint finish or extruded aluminum, thickness as determined by manufacturer for structural strength, with clear anodized finish. Equivalent lead thickness shall be 2.00 mm.

3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials and equipment in accordance with accepted shop drawings and manufacturer=s recommendations, and as required by codes and governing agencies having jurisdiction.

B. Install lead-lined drywall vertically, with joints running from floor to ceiling as required by

Standards. Install lead lining on shielded room side of partition.


C. Joints: Where batten strips are used, where boards with different thickness of lead abut and where lead-lined board abuts unlined board, shim at studs as necessary to furnish flush surface. Where batten strips are required for lead thickness over z@ (1.59 mm) install not less than 2"-wide strips of lead over studs where vertical joints occur. Install strips of continuous lengths, furnishing 1" overlap on each side of joint.

1. Fastenings: Fasten boards to studs with screws spaced maximum of 8" on center at edges and 12" on center at intermediate studs. Cover screws with lead tab protection devices. Install fastenings in such manner that finish application of joint compound or plaster will completely cover the screws with their protection devices.

D. Pre-Drilling: Drill pilot holes as necessary to prevent deformation of fastener and distortion

of board.

E. Where built-in items penetrate lead linings provide lead shields behind those cutouts as required to maintain continuity of radiation protection. Where outlet boxes, junction boxes, ducts, conduit, and similar items prevent use of shields, provide sheet lead sleeves or linings as required.

F. Provide lead-lined gypsum board on one side only of control partitions between two lead-lined spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Lead Lining of Frames: Line or cover hollow metal frames and stops for doors with sheet

lead. Weld, glue, and clip into place. Install sheet lead free of waves, lumps, wrinkles with as few joints as possible. Maintain continuity of radiation protection at joints in sheet lead. Finish joints smooth and neatly. Metal door frames for lead-lined are specified under SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES.

H. Hardware for Lead-Lined Doors: Stagger bolts for door pulls on plates which penetrate

lead lining relative to opposite plate and recess on side of door opposite pull. Provide lead plugs over recessed nut ends of such bolts. Line hardware cutouts with same lead thickness as core of door.

I. View Window Frames: Fixed hollow metal frames are installed prior to installation of

drywall and are secured to studs. Install lead-lined drywall, bringing lead In the walls into the frame to overlap shielding devices.

3.02 TESTING

A. After radiation protection has been installed and equipment is functioning, the Owner will secure the services of a local physicist or shielding integrity contractor to check the installation with appropriate monitoring devices. Correct any Work that is found to be deficient in radiation protection.


Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. June 3, 2015 MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 15100 - 1

SECTION 15100 - MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division-1, General

Requirements apply to this section. 1.2 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The contract drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the work. The

Contractor shall be responsible for installing the proposed systems as indicated, without violation of applicable codes, standards, or specification requirements. The Contractor is also responsible for coordinating the installation and operation of these systems with the other sections of this specification to provide a complete and operable system. Equipment, piping, and ductwork arrangements shall fit the space as indicated and shall allow adequate and approved clearance for entry, servicing and maintenance. Detailed drawings of any proposed departures due to actual field conditions shall be submitted to the Architect for approval. All work shall conform to the requirements of the referenced publications and as specified herein.

1.3 CONFORMANCE WITH AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. Where materials or equipment are specified to conform to requirements of the

Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., Factory Mutual Systems, Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute, Air Diffusion Council, American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, or the Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc., the Contractor shall submit proof of such conformance. The label or listing of the specified agency will be acceptable evidence. In lieu of the label or listing, the Contractor may submit a written certificate from any approved, nationally recognized testing organization adequately equipped and competent to perform such services, stating that the items have been tested and that the units conform to the requirements, including methods of testing, of the specified agency. Where equipment is specified to conform to requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, the design, fabrication, and installation shall conform to the code in every respect.

1.4 CAPACITIES A. Capacities of all equipment and material shall be not less than those indicated, nor exceed

maximum values shown on the drawings. Physical dimensions of equipment shall be verified against contract documents to ensure manufacturer=s maintenance space is available.


1.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Necessary supports shall be provided for equipment, appurtenances, pipe, and ductwork

as required. Isolation vibration units shall be provided to minimize the intensity of vibration transmission to the building structure where required.

1.6 ELECTRICAL WORK A. Electric-motor-driven equipment specified herein shall be provided complete with motors

and controls. Electric equipment and wiring shall be in accordance with Division 16000, "Electrical Work". Electrical characteristics shall be as indicated. Each motor shall be of sufficient capacity to drive the equipment at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of motor when operating at proper electrical system voltage. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation herein specified and any control wiring required for controls and devices, but not shown on the electrical plans, shall be provided under this section.

1.7 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. After notice to proceed and before purchasing, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect

for approval, in five bound copies, a list of materials he proposes for the work. Items to be submitted include, but are not limited to, the items listed in each individual section. Partial submittals will not be acceptable and will be returned without review. Submittals shall include the manufacturer's names, trade name, catalog model or number, nameplate data, size, layout dimensions, capacity, project specification and paragraph reference, applicable Federal, industry, and technical society publication references, and other information necessary to establish contract compliance of each item the Contractor proposes to furnish.

1. Shop Drawings: Drawings shall be a minimum of 8 1/2" x 11" in size, except as

specified otherwise. 2. Manufacturer's Data: Submittals for each manufactured item shall be manufacturer's

descriptive literature of cataloged products, equipment drawings, diagrams, performance and characteristic curves, and catalog cuts. All equipment selections shall be clearly marked with name designations shown on drawings (i.e., AHU-1, HPU-2, etc.).

3. Delivery and Storage: Equipment and materials shall be carefully handled, properly

stored, and adequately protected to prevent damage before and during installation, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the Architect. Damaged or defective items, in the opinion of the Architect, shall be replaced.

4. Cataloged Products: Materials and equipment shall be cataloged products of

manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such materials or equipment and shall be manufacturer's latest design that complies with the specification requirements. Materials and equipment shall duplicate items that have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Where


two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the items need not be the products of the same manufacturer.

1.8 NAMEPLATES A. Each major item of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, serial and

model numbers on a plate securely attached to the item. 1.9 VERIFICATION OF DIMENSIONS A. The Contractor shall visit the premises to thoroughly familiarize himself with all details of

the work and working conditions and verify all dimensions in the field, and shall advise the Architect of any discrepancy before performing any work. The Contractor shall be specifically responsible for the coordination and proper relation of his work to the building structure and to the work of all trades.

1.10 DRAWINGS A. Because of the scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and

accessories that are required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting his work and he shall furnish fittings, offsets, transitions, unions, etc., as may be required to meet such conditions at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.11 CUTTING AND REPAIRING A. The work shall be carefully laid out in advance and no excessive cutting of construction will

be permitted. Damage to building, piping, wiring, or equipment as a result of cutting for installation shall be repaired by mechanics skilled in the trade involved at no additional expense to the Owner.

1.12 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys, and other rotating

parts located so that any person can come in close proximity thereto shall be fully enclosed or properly guarded. High-temperature equipment and piping so located as to endanger personnel or create a fire hazard shall be properly guarded or covered with insulation of a type as specified herein. Items such as catwalks, ladders, and guard rails shall be provided where required for safe operation and maintenance of equipment.

1.13 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS A. Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with the

recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to the Architect prior to installation. Installation


of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material.

1.14 PAINTING A. At the completion of all work, all equipment on this project shall be checked for damage,

and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. Any metal or especially covered areas that have been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match adjacent areas. Painting of new work shall be as specified herein.

1.15 FINAL CLEANUP A. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked and thoroughly

cleaned, including coils, plenums, under equipment, and any and all other areas around or in equipment. Any filters used during construction shall be replaced with new filters during final cleanup.

1.16 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Bound Instructions: Three (3) complete sets of instructions containing the manufacturer's

operating and maintenance instructions for each piece of equipment shall be furnished to the Architect before the contract is completed. Each set shall be permanently bound and shall have a hard cover. The following identification shall be inscribed on the covers: The words "Operating and Maintenance Instructions", the name and location of the building, the name of the Contractor and the contract number. Flysheet shall be placed before instructions covering each subject. The instruction sheet shall be approximately 8 1/2" x 11", with large sheets of drawings folded in. The instructions shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

1. Approved wiring and control diagrams, with data to explain the detailed operation

and control of each component. 2. A control sequence describing start-up, operation and shutdown. 3. Operating and maintenance instructions for each piece of equipment, including

lubrication instructions. 4. Manufacturer's bulletins, cuts and descriptive data. 5. Parts lists and recommended spare parts.

END OF SECTION.

Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. June 3, 2015 TESTING AND BALANCING AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 15200 - 1

SECTION 15200 - TESTING AND BALANCING AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General

Requirements, apply. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: 1. Submit name, address, and qualifications of testing agency to Architect for approval

prior to start of testing. 2. All system adjustments, test and balances are to be performed by a company

regularly and exclusively engaged in this work. Agency shall be a member in good standing of the Associates Air Balance Council (AABC).

3. Procedures shall be as outlined in the AABC Publication “National Standards for

Total System Balance,” 6th edition (2002). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: After completion, submit three (3) certified copies of test and balance report

to the Architect for review and as a project record document. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS A. Commencement of Test: Do not begin balancing until the systems have been completed

and are in full working order, or at the direction of the Architect, place any part thereof in operation for the purpose of balancing.

B. Plans and Data: Furnish the balance agency one (1) complete set of all approved up-to-

date mechanical plans and shop drawings of all cooling, heating and air distribution equipment.

1.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Performance Data: Record the following data and submit to the Architect.

1. Air Volumes and Velocities: Determine and tabulate at each grille, diffuser, louver, outside air intake, etc., and adjust dampers, control devices and fan drives to obtain the indicated air quantities. Adjust or modify each supply grille and diffuser

Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. June 3, 2015 TESTING AND BALANCING AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 15200 - 2

distribution pattern as required to maintain air motion, noise level and temperature variations within acceptable limits throughout each space. Clearly and permanently mark all dampers at final setting for reported air balance.

2. System Component Capacity: Record and calculate all data necessary to

demonstrate capacity under actual operating conditions, and adjust dampers, valves, control valves and machine drives to obtain a suitable operating balance for each system. Record data for each item of equipment simultaneously with data from all associated equipment together with coincident outside air dry bulb temperatures to permit evaluation of total system performance. Data to include the following:

a. Supply, return and outside air quantities for each air conditioning and

ventilation system. b. Air volumes and velocities for each fan, cooling coil and air cleaning

assembly. c. Entering and leaving air dry bulb and wet bulb temperature for each cooling

and heating coil. Leaving dew point for each cooling coil. d. Static pressures for all air handling units and major fans. e. Actual voltage and current input for each motor. f. Test and adjust each diffuser grille, and register within 10 percent of design

requirements. Test and record temperature rise, voltage, and current across duct heaters.

3. In readings and test diffusers, grilles and registers include required fpm velocity and

test fpm velocity, and required cfm and test cfm after adjustments. 1.6 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS A. Set adjustments of all controllers to operate as indicated. Make four hour temperature

traverse of each area or zone. Provide testing agency personnel with instruments to verify reports to Architect.

1.7 FINAL TEST A. At conclusion of testing agency's work, demonstrate to the Architect that the equipment is

mechanically sound, that the systems deliver the rated output without objectionable noise, distress or vibration, and that the temperature controls are functioning properly.

END OF SECTION.

Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. June 3, 2015 PLUMBING 15400 - 1

SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work to be performed under this section of the Specification shall include all labor,

materials, equipment, transportation, construction, facilities, and incidentals necessary for the proper execution and completion of all Plumbing work as shown and indicated on the Contract Drawings, and/or specified herein with the intent that the installation shall be complete in every respect and ready for use.

1.2 GUARANTEE A. All materials and equipment provided and/or installed under this section of the

specifications shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of the work by the Owner. Should any trouble develop during this period due to defective materials or faulty workmanship, the Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor and materials to correct the trouble without any cost to the Owner.

1.3 CODES AND REGULATIONS A. All work performed under this section shall conform with all local governing

regulations, and in case of conflicting requirements, the most stringent shall apply. Minimum requirements shall be the Florida Plumbing Code. All electrically operated equipment specified in this section shall comply with the National Electrical Code.

B. Should it be found that any part of the work shown or specified is not in accordance

with local regulations, the Architect shall be so advised at the time of bidding and all work installed as required to meet the local codes.

C. The Contractor shall comply with the latest revisions of all county, district, municipal, or

local building codes, interpretations, buildings permits to include but not be limited to:

Florida Building Code – 2010 with all supplements Florida Mechanical Code – 2010 with all supplements Florida Plumbing Code – 2010 with all supplements NFPA-101 (2007) - Life Safety Code Local Municipal Codes

1.4 FEES AND PERMITS A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall obtain and pay for all permits, fees for inspection,

and other charges that may be necessary for fully completing the work. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall make all necessary tests required by City, County, or State


authorities, legal regulations, and/or the Architect, and return to the Architect any certificates of approval issued in this district for plumbing work, etc. signed by the inspector in charge of each particular part of the work.

1.5 RESPONSIBILITY OF BIDDER A. Each bidder shall visit the site of the proposed work and fully acquaint himself with

conditions relating to the construction requirements so that he may fully understand the facilities, difficulties and restrictions contingent upon the execution of the work under this contract. The failure or omission of any bidder to receive or examine any form, instrument, addendum or other document shall in no way relieve any bidder from his obligations with respect to his bid or the contract. The submission of a bid shall be taken as prima facia evidence of compliance with this paragraph and that he has included in his proposal every item of cost necessary for a complete installation of plumbing operations strictly as planned, specified, and intended.

1.6 PIPING A. Provide pipe sleeves through masonry construction, and install escutcheon plates

around exposed piping in all rooms. B. Soil, waste, and vent lines shall be Schedule 40 PVC-DWV in accordance with

Commercial Standards CS272-65 or ASTM Standards D2665-68. Soil, waste, and vent lines penetrating fire rated walls or floor shall be service weight cast iron at the point of penetration only.

C. All plastic pipe shall bear the NSF Seal of Approval, and such other markings as

required by the aforementioned standards. D. Above slab cold water and hot water piping shall be Type "L" hard copper with

sweated joints, using wrought fittings and non-corrosive flux. Below slab cold water piping shall be type "K" soft copper tubing.

1.7 PIPE SUPPORT A. Hangers: Support all suspended piping with clevis type hangers equal to Grinnell

#260, 5'-0" o.c. Architect shall approve all methods of attachment of hangers to construction. Hangers in contact with copper piping shall be copper, or copper plated.

B. Vertical Support: Steel bar base clamped to pipe or grip strut channel with offset

clamps. Support members to be of same material as supported material where possible.

C. All anchorage shall be to studs or solid blocking built into the wall. No plumbing straps

shall be used.


1.8 PIPING PLACEMENT A. Place in most direct manner permitted by construction, free of unnecessary offsets.

Changes in direction by means of standard fittings. B. Grade 2" waste lines 1/4" per foot and 3" and 4" waste lines 1/8" per foot for positive

flow. Secure all piping to structure. C. Soil Pipe: Support to firm earth below floor slabs. 1. Changes in direction of drainage pipe shall be made by means of suitable bends

and branches of Y's and long sweeps. Short radius quarter bends are prohibited. 2. Connections to vertical soil pipe from all connections in horizontal soil pipe to be

made by "Y" fittings. 3. Do not begin work until elevation of final connection point is verified and grading

of entire system can be determined (even if final connection is specified under another section).

D. Vent Pipes: 1. Main soil pipe stacks to be extended up through the building full size with

increaser through roof per code. 2. Connect branch vents into main stacks with connections not less than 4 feet

above the highest fixture. 3. All vent stacks shall be connected at the bottom to main drainage system and all

horizontal runs shall be graded so as to discharge all water or condensation. E. Water Piping: Place supply pipes as shown or as directed in neat arrangement and

parallel or at right angles to walls, joists, etc. 1. Place air chamber extensions 12" long on top of all risers and one pipe size

larger than the riser. 2. Place shock absorbers at each fixture group as recommended by manufacturer.

Shock absorbers shall be PDI certified. 3. Place valves on all water pipe risers and branch lines at point where risers and

branch lines connect to main water lines. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER PIPING


A. All water piping, unless otherwise shown or specified shall be copper pipe Type L or K as specified having a wall thickness of not less than .035 inches. It shall be clean, round, straight, and true to size, free from flaws and other defects.

B. All fittings on copper pipe shall be copper. The pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly

cleaned before inserting into the joint and then soldered with lead free solder. 2.2 UNIONS A. Unions shall be provided on inlet and outlet of all apparatus and equipment. Where

valves are adjacent to equipment, unions shall be on downstream side of valves. B. Unions in copper pipe shall be cast bronze, WOG pattern, ground joint, 150 psi type. C. Unions in steel pipe shall be malleable iron, WOG female pattern brass seat, ground

joint, 150 psi type. D. Unions connecting dissimilar metals shall be dielectric type. 2.3 TRAP PRIMER DISTRIBUTION UNIT A. A trap primer distribution system shall be equal to Precision Plumbing Products DU

Series to serve number of fixtures, as indicated on drawings off one (1) primer. Unit shall be installed per manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Trap Primer: Install on flush tanks and fixture supplies where indicated: 1. Flush tanks: Precision Plumbing Products P/N WCP-1. 2. Fixture Cold water supply: Precision Plumbing Products PR-500. 2.4 VALVES AND COCKS A. Valves and cocks shall be installed where shown on the drawings, and/or where found

to be necessary for proper operation of the system. All branches from risers, all branches from mains, and all fixtures or equipment not having stops shall be provided with valves whether shown or not.

B. Angle or straightway chromium plated stops on the supplies to all fixtures accessible

from the same room in which the fixtures are located. C. All valves shall be the product of one manufacturer as cataloged by Milwaukee,

Stockham, Crane, or Nibco. D. For water piping, valves shall be equal to 125 psi SWP/200 psi WOG Nibco as follows:

1. Gate valves 1/2" to 3" = S-111. 2. Ball valves 1/2" to 2" = S-585. 3. Check valves 1/2" to 3" = S-413W.


2.5 WALL HYDRANTS A. Wall hydrants shall be box type, 1/2", freeze proof, keyless with nickel bronze face

plate and vacuum breaker. Mount flush with wall. Wall hydrant shall be equal to Zurn Z-1321.

2.6 THERMAL INSULATION WORK A. All insulation work shall be performed by experienced insulation application mechanics

thoroughly familiar with and experienced in the application of insulation materials. All insulation materials shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's published recommended methods. Installation and finish of insulation materials shall meet with complete data for approval of materials and application methods as proposed for use. All piping shall be pressure tested and all surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned before covering is applied. Insulation materials, including sealer, adhesive, finish, etc., shall meet NFPA Standards with regard to flame spread and support of combustion.

B. All hot and cold water piping shall be covered with 1" thick heavy density fiberglass

sectional pipe insulation equal to Owens Corning Fiberglass 25 ASJ/SSL, excluding piping below grade or chromium plated fixture connections.

C. Fittings for the above shall be insulated with premolded fitting insulation of the same

material and thickness as the adjacent insulation and shall be covered with a premolded plastic (PVC) vapor barrier and sealed with vapor barrier lagging adhesive. Covering adjacent to unions and other points of termination shall be finished with the plastic material neatly beveled.

D. It shall be the responsibility of the insulation subcontractor to coordinate hanger

locations and prevent crushing or breaking finishes. E. Contractor shall insulate hot water supply assembly and P-Trap assembly with

Armaflex 3/8" foam insulation kit on handicapped lavatories.

F. Floor drain traps and horizontal piping above finished areas used for a/c condensate drainage shall be insulated with 1" thick blanketed insulation.

2.7 FLOOR, WALL, AND CEILING PLATES A. Nickel plated floor, wall, and ceiling plates shall be provided on all pipes passing

through floor, ceiling, or partition. Nickel or chromium plated escutcheons shall be provided on all fixture supplies.


2.8 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT A. Provide roughing-in for and connect to supply lines, waste and vent lines, all

equipment, fixtures, drains, etc., specified herein or in other sections of the specifications which require such connections.

B. Provide stops in hot and cold water connections to each fixture, equipment items, etc. Where not otherwise specified, stops shall be same as specified hereinbefore for ball valves. Provide deep escutcheon on all sinks and lavatories where waste pipe goes into wall. Anchor all supplies from wall securely within wall construction.

C. Provide stops for all fixtures. Traps for all fixtures shall be 17- gauge chromium plated

brass. D. Plumbing fixtures shall be equal to American Standard, Crane, Kohler, Zurn, Acorn,

Elkay or Eljer. No others will be accepted. E. Faucets shall be lead free, code compliant, and certified to NSF Standard 61, Section

9.

F. Plumbing fixtures shall be as follows:

P-1 WATER CLOSET (Handicapped): Kohler K-3979 17" high elongated bowl, flush tank. Provide with flexible riser with stop and Beneke 523 white open front seat less cover.

P-2 LAVATORY (Handicapped): Kohler K-2867, 19" x 17" wall hung with Delta

2529LF-HDF faucet with grid waste. Provide 1-1/4", 17-gauge P-Trap, flexible supplies equal to Eastman and feet supported concealed arm carrier equal to Zurn Z-1231. Provide trap wrap 500R protective kit by Brocar or equal.

P-3 DRINKING FOUNTAIN (Handicapped): Elkay EDFP217C barrier free, split-

level, lead free, wall hung type. Provide 1-1/4”, 17-gauge P-Trap, flexible supply equal to Eastman, and carrier equal to Zurn Z-1225. Mount fixture in compliance with ADA for handicap use.

P-4 MOP SINK: 24" x 24" x 12” deep, floor mounted Terrazzo mop sink. Fiat

Model TSB 100 with strainer for 3" drain. Provide 63.600A service faucet with vacuum breaker and pail hook, hose and hose bracket, and mop hanger.

P-5 LOUNGE SINK: Just DLX-2133-16-GR, 33” x 21” x 10-1/2” deep, counter

mounted, stainless steel, double compartment, 4-hole sink with Just J-901 deck faucet with spray. Provide two (2) Just J-35 strainers with direct connection end outlet continuous waste, 1-1/2”, 17-gauge P-Trap, flexible supplies with angle stops equal to Eastman, and garbage disposal. Disposal shall be equal to InSinkErator.

P-6 EXAM SINK: Stainless steel, single compartment, Just SLXD-2019-16-GR, 20”

x 19” x 12” deep with T&S B-2865-4-122X rigid gooseneck faucet (minimum 5” clearance from deck to spray) with wrist blades and grid strainer. Provide 1-


1/2”, 17-gauge chromium plated tail piece, P-Trap, and flexible supplies equal to Eastman.

P-7 ICE MAKER VALVE BOX: 9” x 6” full recessed, Guy Gray BIM875 with 1/2"

FIP inlet x 1/4" O.D. outlet compression angle valve.

P-8 COFFEE MACHINE: Provided by others. Plumbing contractor to make all water connections.

P-9 CHILLED WATER TRANSFER STATION: Provided by owner. Plumbing

contractor to make all waste and water connections. Plumbing contractor to verify waste and water connection sizes prior to installation.

G. Floor Drains (All Locations): Zurn ZN-415 Series with nickel bronze top and flashing

collar. Floor drains shall be provided with trap primer tap as indicated on plans. Floor drain traps and horizontal piping above finished areas used for a/c condensate drainage shall be insulated with 1" thick blanketed insulation.

H. Floor Sink: Sani-floor receptor, Zurn Z1960 with 8” round slotted grate and interior

dome strainer. Coordinate grate type and exact location of floor sink with architect/owner.

2.9 CLEANOUTS A. Provide in cast iron sanitary piping at all changes in direction at ends of branches, at

intervals not exceeding 40' on straight runs, and elsewhere as shown. Cleanouts shall be full opening type completely accessible. Size same as lines in which they occur, but not larger than 4". Tees and extensions shall be of same weight as pipe. Plugs shall be countersunk type. Catalog numbers from Josam or approved equal.

B. In Tile Floors: 56030-2, adjustable, cast iron body with cadmium plug and satin

finished square scoriated Nikaloy top; where soft tile occurs, provide 56030-12-2 recessed square Nikaloy cover.

C. In Concrete Floors: 58190, adjustable head, cast iron head and ferrule with cadmium

plug, round loose set scoriated tractor cover. D. In Finished Walls: 58790 cast iron cleanout tee with cadmium plug and stainless steel

wall plate cover. Where distance from plug to finish wall will exceed 4", provide 58710 extend cover from sanitary tee to bring plug within 4".

E. In Quarry Tile Floors: 56040-13-1, adjustable cast iron head and ferrule, cadmium

plug and round brass terrazzo cover and rim. 2.10 ACCESS DOORS

A. Provide Phillip Carrey, J.R. Smith, Zurn or equal Smith Model #4761, 12" x 16" chromium plated steel access panels where valves, trap primers, or shock absorbers


occur in inaccessible walls or ceilings. All doors and covers shall be completely removable from frames. All hinges must be concealed type. Steel frames shall be 16-gauge with 14-gauge steel doors. Access doors installed in fire rated assemblies shall be UL fire rated type with automatic closures.

2.11 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

A. Water heater shall have storage capacity and input KW as scheduled on the drawings. Units shall meet or exceed the energy requirements of ASHRAE Standard 90, shall be UL listed, and shall bear the Underwriters’ Laboratories label. Tanks shall be coated with a ceramic coating which shall be warranted for a period of five (5) years against defects in materials and workmanship.

B. Thermostats shall be immersion type with low wattage density element of the screw-in

type. C. Provide unit complete with ASME rated pressure and temperature relief valve, vacuum

relief valve, hose bibb, and galvanized drain pan. D. Terminate blow-off from relief valve full outlet size to points indicated. E. Water heater shall be Rheem, Ruud, Bradford White or A. O. Smith and shall be

commercial type as indicated. Verify voltage from electrical plans. 2.12 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE A. Valve and piping assembly shall be completely assembled with unions and fittings

ready for installation. Valve and piping assembly shall have a rough brass finish with integral check stops, strainer, volume control shut-off valve, and color coded 3" face thermometer.

B. The mixing valve shall conform to ASSE 1070 or CSA B125.3. The mixing valve shall

have a solid bimetal thermostat directly linked to valve porting to control the intake of hot and cold water and compensate for supply temperature or pressure fluctuations. The valve inlet and outlet sizes shall be as indicated on the drawings. The mixing valve shall have a union angle strainer, checkstops on inlets, adjustable high temperature limit stop set for 120 degrees F, internal parts of bronze, brass and stainless steel, integral wall support, cast lever handle, color coded dial, HOT-COLD, with directional indicators, and a maximum operating pressure of 125 PSI. The valve shall be Leonard “TM” Series or an approved equal. Selected valve shall be piped in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COMPLETION OF WORK


A. This Contractor shall arrange for the installation of all equipment in order that it progresses along with the general construction of the building, and in no case shall hold up other phases of the work due to the fact his equipment is not properly installed.

3.2 TESTING A. General: Perform all tests in the presence of the Architect or his representative. Test

shall conform to local code requirements. File copies of all test reports in duplicate to physical plant.

B. Soil, Waste, and Vent Systems: Plug all openings, fill entire system with water to point

of overflow and hold for at least one hour before inspection. System must remain full during the test without leakage. Each vertical stack with its branches may be tested separately, but any portion tested must have a 10' head. Provide test tees and plugs for all tests as required.

C. Water Supply System: Test and secure acceptance of entire system before the piping

or hot water heaters are otherwise concealed. Test as follows: Disconnect and cap all outlets to plumbing fixtures and all other equipment not designed for the full test pressure. Fill the system with water; apply 150 psi hydrostatic pressure and hold until inspection is completed. All piping throughout shall be tight under test. Water piping shall remain under normal water pressure during construction where freezing conditions do not exist.

3.3 DISINFECTION A. Disinfect all domestic water piping in accordance with local health department

guidelines. END OF SECTION.

Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. June 3, 2015 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING 15800 - 1

SECTION 15800 - HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work consists of furnishing all labor, materials and incidentals necessary for a

completely functional system. In general, the work shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following major subdivisions.

Ductwork, grilles, and diffusers Insulation Split system direct expansion heat pump unit (Ductless) Packaged roof top air conditioning equipment Fire dampers Exhaust fans 1.2 CODES, FEES, PERMITS A. The Contractor shall comply with all county, district, municipal, or local building code,

interpretations, building permits and assessments of fees for building permits, and ordinances.

B. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all required permits, inspections, and certificates of

inspection. Certificates of inspection shall be delivered to the Architect upon completion of the job.

C. The Contractor shall comply with the latest revisions of all county, district, municipal, or

local building codes, interpretations, buildings permits to include but not be limited to: ASHRAE, 2008 "HVAC Systems and Equipment" - Chapter 18, Duct Construction

SMACNA Standards for Duct Construction Florida Building Code – 2010 with all supplements Florida Mechanical Code - 2010 with all supplements Florida Plumbing Code - 2010 with all supplements NFPA-90A (2009) - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems NFPA-99 (2005) - Health Care Facilities NFPA-101 (2009) - Life Safety Code Local Municipal Codes 1.3 RESPONSIBILITY OF BIDDER A. Each bidder shall visit the site of the proposed work and fully acquaint himself with

conditions relating to the construction requirements so that he may fully understand the facilities, difficulties and restrictions contingent upon the execution of the work under this contract. The failure or omission of any bidder to receive or examine any form, instrument, addendum or other document shall in no way relieve any bidder from his obligations with respect to his bid or the contract. The submission of a bid shall be taken as prima facia


evidence of compliance with this paragraph and that he has included in his proposal every item of cost necessary for a complete installation of air conditioning, heating and ventilation operations strictly as planned, specified, and intended.

1.4 SUB-DIVISIONS OF WORK A. Each sub-division of work includes furnishing and installing all materials to make that part

of work complete, and shall comprise all auxiliaries, setting of equipment, sleeves through building construction where required and etc., all in complete coordination with General Contractor and in cooperation with other trades. It is contemplated that all sub-divisions of work when completed will form heating, air conditioning, and ventilation system for this project.

1.5 DRAWINGS A. The drawings for the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning for this job are

diagrammatic. The Contractor shall make his own measurements at the site and in the buildings during construction and install the systems as the work progresses in such a manner that the equipment, piping, conduit, panels, and ductwork will fit into the finished space provided maintaining headroom; and be neatly installed. All equipment and its interconnecting piping, ductwork, conduit, etc., shall be provided.

B. Due to differences between various manufacturers, it is not practicable to show exact

dimensions of units, nor to show or specify all minor details of equipment. Contractor shall provide all valves, fittings and accessories as necessary for a complete installation, whether or not specifically mentioned or shown.

C. Equipment shall not be acceptable if operated in excess of the recommended and

published ratings of the manufacturer. 1.6 FOUNDATIONS A. The Contractor shall furnish all special foundations and supports for equipment, ductwork

and piping which he installs and which are separate and distinct from building construction as shown by Architectural drawings.

1.7 SAFETY PROVISIONS A. Contractor shall be required at all times to perform his work in strict accordance with the

Williams-Steiger Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1970. B. Equipment with any projecting or rotating parts shall be totally enclosed or properly

guarded.


1.8 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. This Contractor shall be held responsible for elimination of all noises or vibrations

transmitted to occupied areas from equipment which he may install. This applies particularly to airborne noises in ductwork, vibration and noises in piping, and vibration from mechanical equipment transmitted through bases to building structure.

B. This Contractor shall furnish and install all flexible connectors for ductwork connected to

motor driven equipment. C. Contractor shall closely coordinate work for location of mechanical equipment and roof

openings. 1.9 MOTORS AND STARTERS A. This Contractor shall be responsible for the furnishing in place of all electric motors

required for the operation of all heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment. Electrical Contractor to provide all power wiring and conduit required for the operation of electrical motors as specified. Electric motors shall be selected in sizes as required to properly operate the equipment furnished but in no case smaller than those indicated on Equipment Schedules. Verify all electrical characteristics from electrical drawings before releasing motors for shipment. Electric motors shall have a service factor of 1.15 and power factor in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1-2007.

B. This Contractor shall furnish all magnetic motor starters required to operate heating,

ventilating, and air conditioning equipment and turn over to the Electrical Contractor for installation. All motor starters shall be provided with:

1 thermal overload per phase leg. A 110 volt coil and a hand-off-automatic switch, if motors are subject to electrical interlock

unless otherwise specified. C. Phase Failure/Phase Reversal Protection shall be provided on all three phase motors.

Motor protection shall be by Symcom Inc., or Time Mark Corp. D. If equipment is provided with R.L.A. in excess of design conditions the Mechanical

Contractor shall stand the expense of associated electrical changes. E. It is the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor to provide thermal overloads of the

proper size as required by the actual motor nameplate amps. Motor starters shall comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and the local utility service company.

1.10 PAINTING A. All equipment furnished without factory paint or galvanized finish shall be thoroughly

cleaned and given a prime coat, then a finish coat of paint in a color as selected by Architect/Engineer. Any equipment finish that is damaged or chipped, shall be spot


painted to match existing surface. Any miscellaneous metals used by this Contractor that are not galvanized shall be given two coats of paint in color specified by Architect. Any rusty or corroded finishes shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted two coats of paint - one prime and one finish coat.

1.11 TESTS AND GUARANTEES A. After completion of his work, and when the building is ready for occupancy, this Contractor

shall operate the air conditioning or heating system for a period of two days. During the tests, the Contractor shall adjust controls, outlets, etc.

B. The Contractor shall repeat operational sequence during heating and/or cooling season,

whichever had not been subject to prior test period. 1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Materials and equipment schedules shall be submitted as soon as practicable but not later

than thirty (30) days after the date of award of contract, and before commencement of installation of any material or equipment. A complete schedule of the material and equipment proposed for installation shall be submitted for approval. The schedule shall include catalogs, cuts, diagrams, drawings, specifications and such other descriptive data as may be required by the Engineer. All materials required to be submitted for approval under this section shall be submitted at one time. Partial submittals will not be considered. They will be returned as "not approved".

B. Shop drawings shall be submitted for approval on the following items of equipment:

Subject drawings shall include all data pertinent to the performance and installation of all equipment.

Air Distribution Devices - grilles, diffusers, dampers Temperature controls Insulation materials Split system direct expansion heat pump unit (Ductless) Packaged roof top air conditioning units Fire Dampers Exhaust fans 1.13 QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. It is not the intent of these specifications to limit material and/or equipment selections to

one manufacturer; however, the Engineer reserves the right to be the final and sole judge with regard to equals.

B. Approvals of equipment is based on capacities, equality of workmanship and components,

or general and special construction features. Approval of equipment does not relieve the Contractor of coordination responsibility with other trades. Equipment shall fit within the physical space of equipment shown and have same general connection as that shown on drawings. Proper clearances shall be maintained for servicing and maintaining equipment.


C. Where equipment submitted varies from the general arrangement of that specified,

Contractor shall submit detailed sheetmetal and equipment brochures. Shop drawings shall indicate any and all sheetmetal, electrical, piping and structural changes required to facilitate change. Any and all additional costs incurred by changes will be borne by this Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REFRIGERANT PIPING

A. Piping shall be type "K" hard drawn copper, ASTM Spec. B280, and shall be mill cleaned, dried, and capped.

B. Fittings shall be extra heavy wrought copper in accordance with ANSI B9.1 with joints

soldered using a high content silver alloy solder. C. Installation shall be in accordance with unit manufacturer's requirements with all piping

secured to walls and ceilings with approved galvanized hangers and clamps. Entire installation shall be in accordance with ANSI Standard B31.5 for refrigerant piping.

D. Insulate refrigerant suction line with 3/4" wall foamed plastic insulation slipped over tubing

and all joints thoroughly sealed. Paint insulation with two coats of acrylic protective paint where insulation is exposed to weather. Protect insulation with metal saddles and shields at all hanger points.

E. All refrigerant piping routed below grade shall be routed in 6" PVC conduit with ends

sealed to be rodent proof. F. Suspend piping as required with approved pipe hangers at 8'-0" on center. G. If field piping is used, piping diagrams shall be submitted by unit manufacturer showing

pipe sizes, traps, service valves, etc., required for proper operation of equipment. Pre-charged tubing may be used at Contractor's option.

H. Test refrigerant system at 300 psi before charging system where units are to be field

charged. System is to be thoroughly purged and evacuated before charging with refrigerant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. If factory pre-charged tubing is used, unit shall be checked and monitored for proper charge and efficient operation.

2.2 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT (Ductless Type Unit)

A. Air conditioning unit shall be wall mounted type. Front of unit shall be sloped to prevent recirculating air back through evaporator coil. Provide unit with heavy gauge aluminum return air grille, washable aluminum filter, four-way adjustable discharge louver, unit mounted thermostat and 2-speed fan switch, 2-speed fan motor, sweat type refrigerant


connections, integral condensate drain pan, integral condensate pump and wired thermostats.

B. Condensing unit shall be compact with low profile design. Cabinet shall be galvanized

steel with baked enamel finish. Safety controls shall include low and high pressure switches. Unit may be equipped with a rotary or reciprocating type compressor. Provide sweat type refrigerant connections.

C. Equipment installation and refrigerant sizing shall be per manufacturer's instructions. Unit

shall be manufactured by Diakin, Mitsubishi or approved equal. 2.3 ROOF MOUNTED PACKAGED HEAT PUMP UNIT

A. Furnish and install where indicated on plans air to air rooftop packaged heat pump units. Unit cabinet shall be galvanized steel, minimum 20-gauge, with prime coat and two part epoxy finish. There shall be no cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel used in any part of the unit.

B. All panels of evaporator and blower compartment shall be insulated with fibrous glass

insulation 1 2 pound density, min. 1" thick. C. Unit design shall be certified to conform to UL Standard 539, by Applied Research

Laboratories of Florida, Inc., or by other nationally recognized testing laboratory. D. The unit shall be shipped completely factory assembled, precharged, piped and wired

internally. Complete unit must be test operated at the factory prior to shipment. Unit shall have single source power supply with disconnect.

E. Total cooling and heating capacity shall be as scheduled on the drawings and shall be as

manufactured by Trane, Lennox, York, Carrier or approved equal. F. Units shall have minimum cooling energy efficiency ratio (EER) as scheduled. G. Units shall have heating coefficient of performance (COP) as scheduled. H. Compressors shall be 3450 rpm, full hermetic type with internal motor protection or 1750

rpm semi-hermetic type. Condenser coil and evaporator coil shall have aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes, and both shall be fed with a single thermostatic expansion valve designed to control flow in both directions. There shall be no check valves installed in the refrigerant system. System shall include high and low pressure safety controls located externally from the compressor, which shall break the control voltage to the compressor contactor. Refrigerant flow shall be directed by a four-way reversing valve. Each compressor circuit shall be equipped with a factory installed filter-drier and sight-glass-moisture indicator.

I. Each compressor shall be equipped with a suction accumulator properly sized and

constructed to prevent refrigerant flooding. J. Each compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater to prevent oil dilution on the

off-cycle.


K. Controls shall include contactor, 24 volt control transformer with minimum of 75VA rating, blower relay, and timer-type defrost control system.

L. Condenser fan motors shall be 1075 rpm with sealed ball bearings and inherent overload

protection. M. Condenser fan guards shall be vinyl-coated and shall fully cover the coil. N. Belt driven blowers shall be equipped with sealed ball bearings. When two blowers are

used, they shall be driven from a common shaft, and include only three ball bearings. O. Belt drive motors shall be 1750 rpm with sealed ball bearings. All motors 2 HP and smaller

shall have inherent protection. Motors 3 HP and larger may have starters with overload heaters.

P. Unit shall be equipped with special control to prevent compressors from trying to restart

within 5 minutes after loss of power or thermostat interruption. Control shall be factory installed and integral with unit control system.

Q. Unit shall be equipped with factory installed phase loss and low voltage monitor to

immediately stop compressor operation if one leg of a three phase system is lost or if voltage falls to dangerously low levels.

R. Roof curb shall be completely welded construction, and shipped assembled from the

factory. It shall require no field assembly. Material shall be galvanized steel, minimum 16-gauge. Inside of curb shall be fully insulated with 1" thick, 1 2 pound density fibrous glass insulation. A wood nailer shall be assembled to the curb for flashing attachment. Curb height shall be as required to set bottom of unit minimum 8" above finished roof. All ductwork shall pass through roof within the roofcurb. Roofcurb shall be bolted to roof deck support structure. The unit shall be secured to the curb with lag screws (2 minimum on each side).

S. Entire bottom of unit shall be covered with 3/8" thick foamed plastic insulation to provide

thermal insulation, sound attenuation and curb sealing. T. Each unit shall be completely factory assembled, requiring no field assembly. Cabinet

must be single, unitized design. U. Air filters shall be 2" thick disposable type. Filters shall be installed within the unit and

easily removable for service. V. Electric resistance heaters shall be furnished and factory-installed within the unit with

capacity as scheduled and shall be UL approved. W. All internal wiring shall be completed at the factory with single point termination requiring

only one field connection for power wiring. Heater operation shall be factory tested with the unit in operation. All required compressor or heater branch circuit fusing shall be factory-installed.

X. Units shall be provided with motor operated outside air intake damper and bird screen.

The motor operated damper shall be interlocked with the compressor such that as the


compressor is operational the damper shall be open and otherwise the damper shall be closed.

2.4 EXHAUST FANS

A. All exhaust fans shall bear the AMCA Seal of Approval and shall be currently listed in the current AMCA Directory.

B. Exhaust fans shall be ceiling mounted type fans with 1/2" thick acoustical lined steel

housing, direct drive centrifugal fan, back draft damper and integral aluminum ceiling grille. Fan control shall be by separate wall mounted switch. Fans shall be equal to Greenheck SP Series.

2.5 CONTROL OPERATIONS

A. General space temperature shall be controlled by wall mounted thermostats located within the spaces as indicated on drawings. Thermostat subbase shall include a system selector switch (OFF-HEAT-AUTO-COOL) and fan switch (AUTO-ON) and be provided by the heat pump equipment manufacturer. Thermostats shall be 7-day programmable and have battery back-up with night low and high limit settings.

B. Wiring: All control wiring external to the heat pump equipment shall be installed by the

control sub-contractor under the direct supervision of the HVAC subcontractor. C. Note: All wiring required for equipment operations shall be by the electrical contractor.

This Contractor shall also provide all conduit as required for control wiring. D. Test all units for two (2) 8-hour days under the supervision of manufacturer's

representative, who shall make all necessary adjustments and instruct designated operating personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment and controls.

2.6 CONTROLS

A. Contractor shall furnish and install all relays, transformers, contacts, etc., as required to control automatically the heating and air conditioning equipment. Submit control drawings for approval. Control drawings shall be complete and shall indicate complete control sequence of operation.

B. All control wiring shall be installed in conduit and shall be sized as recommended by unit

manufacturer. All wiring shall be color coded to match system wiring diagrams and shall be installed in accordance with the electrical section of this specification.

C. Provide a motorized damper in the outside air intake for A/C unit. Damper shall open

during occupied hours and close during unoccupied hours. D. Motorized dampers shall be low leakage type dampers similar to Ruskin Model CD-50.


2.7 DUCTWORK

A. The sizes, runs, and connections of ducts shall be as indicated. Adhere to drawings as closely as possible. The right is reserved, however, if required to meet structural or other interferences, to vary run and shape of ducts and offsets during progress of work, at no extra cost to the Owner. Ductwork specified herein shall have rectangular cross section, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Materials - Methods of Construction: Details of construction and materials not specified

herein shall be in accordance with SMACNA Low Velocity and ASHRAE "Guide" recommendations. Fabricate ductwork in workmanlike manner with airtight joints presenting smooth surface on inside, neatly finished on outside. Seal all duct joints airtight with approved tape or mastic before insulation is applied. Construct ductwork air extractors, spin-in taps with air scoops, turning vanes, splitter dampers, etc., to ease air flow and balancing of air. The joint between the trunk duct and any air extractor or spin-in tap shall be sealed with approved tape or mastic. Unless otherwise indicated, where square elbows have to be used, provide fixed deflectors. Construct, brace and support ducts in manner that they will not sag or vibrate to any perceptible extent when fans are operating at maximum speed and capacity. Ductwork shall be galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise specified. Distance between joints of any size duct shall not exceed 8'.

C. Flexible ductwork shall not exceed 8' in length. Flexible ductwork shall be equal to

Thermaflex Type M-KB with 1"-1 lb. density insulation (minimum "R" value = 6) with metalized film vapor barrier, and conform to UL-181 as a Class I duct.

D. Sheet metal gauges for rectangular duct construction shall be:

Steel U.S. Std. Gauge

Maximum Size Inches

Type of Transverse Joint Conn.

Bracing

26 Up to 12 S-Drive, pocket or bar clips, on7'-10" centers with tape or

mastic None

24 13 to 24 S-Drive, pocket or bar clips,

on 7'-10" centers with tape or mastic

None

24 25 to 30 S-Drive, pocket or bar clips,

on 7'-10" centers with tape or mastic

1x1x1/8" angle

4' from joint

E. Duct Support: Support horizontal ducts with hangers spaced not more than 8' apart, place

hangers at changes in directions. Use strap hangers for ducts up to 30" wide, angle hangers for ducts over 30" wide. Make strap hangers 1" by 16-gauge minimum, extended down both sides of duct and turn under bottom 2" minimum, fasten sides and bottom with sheet metal screws.

F. Provide flexible duct connections between ducts and heat pump unit. Connectors shall be

constructed of 29 ounce neoprene-coated fiberglass approximately 6" wide, bordered by crimping to sheet metal and fastened to ducts with screws not more than 2" on centers.


2.8 DAMPERS

A. Provide splitter and deflecting vanes for control of air volume and direction, and for balancing system where indicated, specified, directed or required.

B. Dampers of same materials as duct, at least one gauge heavier than duct, reinforced

where directed, shall have an accessible location indicating quadrant, locking device for adjusting and locking dampers in position.

C. Stiffen duct at damper location, install damper in manner to prevent rattling. D. Fire Dampers: Shall be curtain type with fusible link. Curtain shall be mounted out of air

stream. Dampers shall be UL approved & equal to Ruskin. 2.9 GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS

A. Supply and return air grilles and diffusers shall be sized not to exceed a N.C. level of (25).

B. Constant volume ceiling diffusers shall be Titus Omni-AA with molded insulation blanket

and opposed blade dampers. C. Variable volume ceiling diffusers (“Therma-Fusers”) shall be Titus T35Q-2 digital diffuers

with wired thermostats and T3PM 120V/24V power module. D. Return air and transfer grilles shall be equal to Titus Model 50F. Size and capacity shall

be as indicated on drawings. Return grilles shall include opposed blade dampers. E. Install and fasten ceiling diffuser and return air grilles as per manufacturer's detailed

drawings, use gaskets to make airtight joints with adjoining construction, join neatly with adjoining finished surface.

2.10 CHILLED WATER PIPING FOR MRI’S A. Chilled water piping between chillers and MRI equipment shall be Type “L” Hard Copper

with soldered joints. Pipe shall be insulated with 2 inch thick Armaflex, closed-cell pipe insulation. All piping between the chiller and the building shall also include an aluminum jacket over the insulation.

2.11 MRI QUENCH VENT PIPING A. Quench vent piping shall be welded stainless steel. Material shall be 20 gauge (minimum).

Stainless steel grade shall be 316. Piping shall be insulated with 1” Armaflex, closed-cell pipe insulation.


2.12 INSULATION

A. Exterior duct insulation shall be applied outside of all heating and air conditioning ductwork in accordance with SMACNA Standards. Insulation shall be constructed of glass fiber and shall be 1.0 pound density, 2" thick and comply with NFPA Bulletins 90A and 90B (minimum R value = 6). Insulation shall be wrapped and shall be secured with duct bands. All joints in insulation shall be butted together and brushed with adhesive.

2.13 AUTOMATIC SHUT-DOWN A. All duct mounted smoke detectors, remote alarm panels, low voltage wiring, relays,

contactors, etc., necessary for interlocking air handling units for complete unit shut down upon smoke detection shall be furnished and installed by the mechanical contractor. Rigid conduit for low voltage wiring shall be furnished and installed by the electrical contractor. Smoke detectors shall be photoelectric 24 volt duct mountable or plenum mountable type as indicated on the drawings and shall be equal to AFirex@ (Photoelectric). A remote wall mounted alarm panel with audible and visual alarm, test/reset switch, trouble indicator and pilot light shall be provided for each smoke detector and located in a continuously monitored area as indicated on the drawings. The remote alarm panel shall also be equal to AFirex@. Each alarm panel shall be labeled with plastic, etched labels clearly indicating the air handling unit being monitored.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TESTING AND BALANCING A. The heating and ventilating subcontractor shall submit to the Owner a record of the

capacities of each grille, register, and equipment opening as determined by the test after final adjustments have been made with a notation for the final setting and average velocity through each outlet as determined by readings of a velometer taken at several points at the face of the register or opening. Air delivery through supply outlets shall be considered equal to that quantity as published in the manufacturer's tables. Return air through return air grilles shall be considered as equal to the product of the velometer velocity and effective area of the register. Test and balance both HVAC systems with ductwork prior to installation of finished ceiling. Once ceilings have been installed the balancing devices and ductwork shall not be accessible for this procedure.

B. Thermostats for the heat pump equipment shall be provided as part of that equipment, and

connected up by the electrical subcontractor, and is tested by the HVAC subcontractor. 3.2 CLEANING VENTILATING SYSTEMS A. All ducts shall be thoroughly cleaned and blown out to prevent any debris from damaging

fan wheels or discharging through diffusers when systems are placed in operations. All temporary connections required for blowing out the system, cheesecloth for all duct openings, and any other equipment or labor for cleaning shall be provided by the heating


and ventilating subcontractor. All filters shall be renewed after ventilating systems have been cleaned. The cost of renewal shall be borne by the General Contractor.

END OF SECTION.

Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. June 3, 2015 ELECTRICAL 16100 - 1

SECTION 16100 - ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General and/or Special Conditions Sections are a part of this specification and the

Contractor shall consult them in detail for instructions pertaining to this work. Section 16 is sub-divided for convenience only.

1.2 SCOPE A. Furnishing of all labor, material, equipment, supplies, and services necessary to

construct and install the complete electrical systems as shown on the drawings and specified herein. Work shall include but is not necessarily limited to the following items:

Demolition

Service Grounding Surge Protection Device (SPD) Interior Distribution/Branch Circuits Lighting Equipment Connections 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Site Inspections: Before submitting proposals, each bidder should visit the site and should become familiar with all job conditions and shall be fully informed as to the extent of the work. No consideration will be given after bid opening date for alleged misunderstanding as to the requirements of work involved in connecting to the utilities, as to requirements of materials to be furnished, or as to the extent of demolition required.

B. Existing Conditions: All utilities, existing systems, and conditions shown on the plans

as existing are approximate, and the Contractor shall verify before any work is started. C. Scheduled Interruptions: Planned interruptions of utilities service, to any facility

affected by this contract, shall be carefully planned and approved by the Architect at least ten (10) days in advance of the requested interruption. The Contractor shall not interrupt services until specific approval has been granted by the Architect. The request shall indicate services to be affected, date and time of interruption and duration of outage. Request for interruption of service will not be approved until all equipment and material required for the completion of that particular phase of work are on the job site. The work may have to be scheduled after normal working hours.


D. Maintaining Service: Any existing service (or operating system) which must be interrupted for any length of time shall be supplied with a temporary service as necessary for continuation of the normal operation of this facility.

E. Removal of Existing Work: Where noted or indicated on the drawings, or specified

herein, existing electrical materials and equipment shall be removed from the building. All materials designated to be removed by the Contractor, and not required to be reinstalled, including scrap, shall become the property of the Contractor, and shall be promptly removed from the site. Hazardous materials shall be disposed of in approved hazardous material disposal facility Existing items required to be removed temporarily in order to properly install new work shall be replaced in a satisfactory manner upon completion.

1.4 TEMPORARY POWER

A. Furnish and maintain temporary wiring system for light and power for use during construction by all trades. Use solidly grounded system. Limit over-current protection to 20 amperes on No. 12 conductors. Pay for all charges incurred while furnishing power for construction. Verify whether charges for electrical power consumption are specified in Division One; if so, payment of bills for power consumption are not included under this section.

B. Accidental Interruptions: All excavation and/or remodeling work required shall be

performed with care so as not to interrupt other existing services (water, gas, electrical, sewer, sprinklers, etc.). If accidental utility interruption resulting from work performed by the Contractor occurs, service shall be immediately restored to its original condition without delay, by and at the expense of the Contractor, using skilled workmen of the trade required.

1.5 CODES, PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A. The installation shall comply with all local, state, and federal laws and ordinances

applicable to electrical installation and with the regulations of the latest published edition of the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.) where such regulations do not conflict with those laws and ordinances. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits and inspection fees, and after completion of the work, shall furnish the Architect a certificate of final inspection and approval from the applicable local inspection authorities. Any charges by a utility for providing service as shown shall be included in the bid and paid by the Contractor.

1.6 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The drawings and these specifications are complimentary each to the other. What is

called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Where the drawings and/or specifications differ as to quantity or quality, the greater quantity or higher quality shall be provided. Omissions from the drawings and specifications of details of work which are evidently necessary to carry out the intent of the drawings and


specifications, or which are customarily performed, shall not relieve the Contractor from performing such work. In any case of discrepancy in the figures or catalog numbers, the matter shall be submitted to the Architect, who shall promptly make a determination in writing. Any adjustment by the Contractor shall be at the Contractor's own risk and expense. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic only. Do not scale these drawings. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and any conflicting data shall be verified before bidding.

1.7 STANDARDS OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. Materials: All materials shall be new and shall be listed and approved by the

Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., in every case where a standard has been established for a particular type of material in question. All work shall be executed in a workmanlike manner and shall present a neat appearance.

B. Prior Approvals: Equipment and materials of the same type or classification and used

for the same purpose, shall be products of the same manufacturer. It is the intention of these specifications to indicate a standard of performance and quality for all materials incorporated in this work. Manufacturer's names and catalog numbers are used to designate the item of equipment or material as a means of establishing grade and quality. Where several manufacturers are named, only those named manufacturers' products will be considered and the Contractor's bid shall be on their products. The first named of several manufacturers is the manufacturer whose product was used in engineering the project. Other named manufacturers, although acceptable as manufacturers, shall guarantee that their product will perform as specified and will meet space requirements. Where performance characteristics of such equipment differs from the equipment scheduled on the drawings, the Architect shall reserve the right to reject it. Where use of such equipment requires different quantity or arrangement of foundations, supports, ductwork, piping, wiring, conduit and any other equipment, the Contractor shall furnish said changes and additions and pay all costs for all changes to the work and the work of others affected by using such equipment.

C. For approval of products other than those specified, bidders shall submit to the

Architect, a request in writing, at least ten (10) days prior to bid date. Requests received after this time will not be reviewed or considered regardless of cause. Requests shall clearly define and describe the product for which approval is requested. Requests shall be accompanied by manufacturer's literature, specifications, drawings, cuts, performance data, model numbers, list of references or other information necessary to completely describe the item. Approval will be in the form of an Addendum to the specifications issued to all prospective Prime Contract Bidders on record. The Addendum will indicate the additional products which are approved for this project.

D. If a bidder proposes to use substitute materials or equipment for the following items,

he shall obtain a minimum of ten (10) days before Bid "Prior Approval" or longer as described in "Instructions to Bidders" for the items indicated below:

1. Panelboards.


2. Dry type transformers. 3. Enclosed circuit breakers 4. Safety switches. 5. Time switches 6. Lighting fixtures

E. Approval on other items shall be handled in the normal manner, as described in "Instructions to Bidders", under the heading "Approval of Materials".

F. Substitutions: Reference to a particular product by manufacturer, trade name, or

catalog number establishes the quality standards of material and equipment required for this installation and is not intended to exclude products equal in quality and similar design. The Architect reserves the sole right to decide the equality of materials proposed for use in lieu of these specified. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish the information and data sufficient to establish the quality and utility of the items in question, including furnishing samples if required.

G. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall submit a list of items proposed for use. He shall

also submit catalog data and shop drawings on proposed systems and their components, panelboards, safety switches, starters and contactors, transformers, lighting fixtures, and wiring devices. Where substitutions alter the design or space requirements, the Contractor shall defray all items of cost for the revised design and construction including costs to all allied trades involved. Data shall be submitted within ten (10) calendar days after the contract is awarded. Provide six (6) copies of shop drawings unless a greater number of copies is required by the General Conditions. Each submittal data section shall be covered with an index sheet listing Contractor, Sub-Contractor, Project Name, and an index to the enclosed submittals.

H. Each major section of submittals such as power, equipment, lighting equipment, fire

alarm, etc., shall be secured in a booklet or stapled with a covering index which lists the following information:

1. General contractor with phone number and project manager.

2. Subcontractor with phone number and project manager .

3. Supplier of equipment with phone number and person responsible for this project.

4. Index of each item covered in submittal and model number as proposed in the

attached. 5. Any deviation from contract documents shall be specifically noted on submittal

cover index and boldly on specific submittal sheet. 1.8 DOCUMENTATION

A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: At completion of the work, furnish three (3) copies of written operation instructions which shall include manufacturer's descriptive


bulletins, operating and maintenance manuals and parts lists of all equipment installed. Also include in such instructions, the specified size and capacity ratings of all equipment installed. Each set of instructions shall be assembled into a suitable looseleaf type binder and presented to the Architect for delivery to the Owner.

B. Record Drawings: Maintain one extra set of black-line, white print drawings for use as

record drawings. Records shall be kept daily, using colored pencil. As the work is completed, relevant information shall be transferred to a reproducible set, and copies made to be given to the Architect.

C. Comply with the following for all work specified in Division Sixteen. As-built

information shall be shown to scale, using standard symbols listed in the legend. As a minimum, show the following:

1. Location of stub-outs, dimensioned from permanent building lines. 2. Location and depth of under-slab and in-slab raceways.

3. All routing of raceways. 4. Corrected panelboard and equipment schedules. 5. Corrected circuit numbers as they appear on panelboard directories. 6. Corrected motor horsepower and full load amperages. 7. Number, size, type of insulation, and number of wires in each conduit or

multiconductor cable whether in conduit or exposed. 8. Location of junction boxes and splices. 9. Location of access panels.

1.9 INTERFACE WITH OTHER CONTRACTS A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to cooperate with all other crafts working

on this project. All cutting, trenching, backfill, and structural removals to permit entry of the electrical system components shall be done by this Contractor. All patching and finishing shall be done by the General Contractor.

1.10 EQUIPMENT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. This Contractor shall furnish and install complete electrical roughing-in and connection

to all equipment furnished under other sections as indicated on drawings. All such equipment shall be set in place as work of other sections.


1.11 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. In general, provide electrical power and control systems connections to all equipment shown on drawings. Included are wiring raceways, disconnects, starters, and other devices shown. Excluded are devices furnished integrally with the manufacturer's package and work specified in other sections of these specifications.

B. Residential appliances are furnished with cords and cord caps, and will be set in place

by contractors performing work under other divisions of specifications. Packaged air conditioning units are all with starters and contactors. Provide disconnecting means and connect. Low voltage control of these devices is specified for installation in Division 15.

1.12 GROUNDING

A. Provide grounding and bonding systems in strict accordance with the latest published edition of N.E.C., except where more stringent requirements are specified herein. Inter-connection of neutral and ground is not permitted except at service entrance equipment. Install grounding conductors to permit shortest and most direct path to ground. Concealed joints shall be made by Cadweld method. Where grounding conductors are in raceway, bond conductor and raceway at both ends. Grounding and bonding fittings used shall be UL listed and be compatible with metals used in system. Sheet metal type strap are not acceptable.

B. A green insulated ground conductor shall be run in all branch circuit and feeder conduit

with phase and/or neutral conductors. Ground conductor shall be sized per NEC or as noted on drawings. Minimum size #12 AWG. Conduit box to device strap or yoke screw connection is not sufficient. Provide an insulated grounding jumper for receptacle circuits.

1.14 GUARANTEE AND SERVICE A. Upon completion of all tests and acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish the Owner of

a written guarantee covering the electrical work done for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance. Guarantee includes equipment capacity and performance ratings specified without excessive noise levels. Upon notice from the Architect or the Owner, the Contractor shall, during the guarantee period, rectify and replace any defective material or workmanship and repair any damage caused thereby without additional cost.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All equipment and materials shall have ratings established by the recognized

independent agency or laboratory. The Contractor shall apply the items used on the project within the ratings and subject to any stipulations or exceptions established by


the independent agency or laboratory. Use of equipment or materials in applications beyond that certified by the agency or beyond that recommended by the manufacturer shall be cause for removal and replacement of such misapplied items.

2.2 PANELBOARDS A. General 1. The Contractor shall furnish and install the panelboards as specified and as

shown on the contract drawings. 2. The panelboards and all components shall be designed, manufactured and

tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of NEMA and UL as follows:

a. UL 67 -- Panelboards b. UL 50 -- Cabinets and boxes c. NEMA PB1 d. Fed. Spec. W-P-115C e. Circuit breaker -- Type I class I

3. The manufacturer of the panelboard shall be the manufacturer of the major

components within the assembly, including circuit breakers and fusible switches. B. Ratings - Panelboards shall be fully rated to the short-circuit rating indicated on the

drawings. C. Construction

1. Interiors shall be completely factory assembled devices. They shall be designed such that switching and protective devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors.

2. Trims for lighting and appliance panelboards shall be supplied with a hinged door

over all circuit breaker handles. Doors in panelboard trims shall not uncover any live parts. Doors shall have a semiflush cylinder lock and catch assembly. Doors over 48 inches in height shall have auxiliary fasteners.

3. Distribution panelboard trims shall cover all live parts. Switching device handles

shall be accessible. 4. Surface trims shall be same height and width as box. Flush trims shall overlap

the box by 3/4 of an inch on all sides. 5. A directory card with a clear plastic cover shall be supplied and mounted on the

inside of each door. 6. All locks shall be keyed alike.


D. Bus 1. Main bus bars shall be plated copper sized in accordance with UL standards to

limit temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 65 degrees C above an ambient of 40 degrees C maximum.

2. A bolted ground bus shall be included in all panels. 3. Full-size (100%-rated) insulated neutral bars shall be included for panelboards

shown with neutral. Bus bar taps for panels with single-pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Neutral busing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection.

E. Circuit Breakers 1. Molded case circuit breakers shall provide circuit overcurrent protection with

inverse time and instantaneous tripping characteristics. Ground fault protection shall be provided where indicated.

2. Circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and shall have a

quick-make, quick-break over-center switching mechanism that is mechanically trip-free. Automatic tripping of the breaker shall be clearly indicated by the handle position. Contacts shall be nonwelding silver alloy and arc extinction shall be accomplished by means of arc chutes. A push-to-trip button on the front of the circuit breaker shall provide a local manual means to exercise the trip mechanism.

3. Provide shunt trips, bell alarms, and auxiliary switches as shown on the contract

drawings. F. Enclosure shall be at least 20 inches wide made from galvanized steel. Provide

minimum gutter space in accordance with the National Electric Code. Where feeder cables supplying the mains of a panel are carried through its box to supply other electrical equipment, the box shall be sized to include the additional required wiring space. At least four interior mounting studs with adjustable nuts shall be provided. Enclosures shall be provided with blank ends.

G. Nameplates - Provide a mechanically fastened engraved phenolic nameplate for each

panel section. H. Finish - Surfaces of the trim assembly shall be properly cleaned, primed, and a

finish coat of gray ANSI 61 paint applied. 2.3 SAFETY SWITCHES A. General - The Contractor shall furnish and install the low-voltage fused and non-fused

switches as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings. B. Provide heavy duty switches as shown on drawings, with the following ratings:

Tenant Improvements for Medquest Associates, Inc. May 29, 2015 ELECTRICAL 16100 - 9

1. 30 to 1200 amperes 2. 250 volts AC, DC; 600 volts AC (30A to 200A 600 volts DC) 3. 2, 3, 4, and 6 poles 4. Fusible and non-fusible 5. Copper/aluminum standard mechanical lugs. C. Construction - Switch blades and jaws shall be plated copper. Switches shall have a

handle that is easily padlockable in the OFF position. Switches shall have defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from opening when the handle is in the ON position. Switch assembly and operating handle shall be an integral part of the enclosure base. Switches rated 100A to 600A shall have reinforced fuse clips. Switch blades shall be readily visible in the OFF position. Switch Operating mechanism shall be non-teasible, positive quick-make/quick-break type.

D. Enclosures. - All enclosures shall be NEMA 1 general purpose unless otherwise noted. E. Nameplates - Nameplates shall be phenolic type, front cover mounted, contain a

permanent record of switch type, ampere rating, and maximum voltage rating. Nameplates shall be mechanically fastened.

2.4 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS

A. General: Dry-type distribution transformers for non-linear loads with three-phase primary and secondary voltages of 600 volts or less and capacity ratings of 15-750kva.

B. Standards: The transformers and all components shall be designed, manufactured,

and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of the following: 1. Transformers 750 kVA and smaller shall be UL listed. 2. Transformers shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. 3. Transformers are to be manufactured and tested in accordance with NEMA

ST20. 4. Transformer losses shall conform to NEMA TP1 requirements. 5. Transformer losses shall be tested in accordance with NEMA TP2 procedures. 6. Transformers shall be labeled in accordance with NEMA TP3 requirements. C. Ratings: 1. KVA and voltage ratings shall be as shown on the drawings. 2. Transformers shall be designed for continuous operation at rated kVA for 24

hours a day, 365 days a year operation, with nomal life expectancy as defined in ANSI C57.96.

3. Transformer sound levels shall not exceed Up to 9 kVA 40 db. 10 to 50 kVA 45 db 51 to150 kVA 50 db


151 to 300 kVA 55 db 301 to 500 kVA 60 db 501 to 700 kVA 62 db 701 to 1000 kVA 64 db 4. Transformer insulation system shall exceed NEMA ST20 standards and be rated

at 220 degrees C, for full load operation at a maximum temperature rise of 115 degrees C. Required performance shall be obtained without exceeding the above indicated temperature rise in a 40 degrees C maximum ambient. Provide continuous emergency overload capability for 15 percent on 115 degree C rise. Taps shall be two (2) steps above and four (4) steps below nominal voltage in 2.5% increments.

5. Transformers shall be low loss type with minimum efficiencies per the table

below when operated at 35% of full load capacity. Efficiency shall be tested in accordance with NEMA TP-2.

Single-Phase Three-Phase

kVA % Efficiency kVA % Efficiency 15.0 97.7 15.0 97.0

25.0 98.0 30.0 97.5 37.5 98.2 45.0 97.7

50.0 98.3 75.0 98.0

75.0 98.5 112.5 98.2 100.0 98.6 150.0 98.3

167.0 98.7 225.0 98.5 250.0 98.8 300.0 98.6

333.0 98.9 500.0 98.7 - - 750.0 98.8

Table per NEMA TP-1 and Energy Act of 2005 (US Public Law 109-58)

6. The transformer coils shall be copper and of continuous wound construction and

shall be impregnated with non-hydroscopic, thermosetting varnish and cured to reduce hot spots and seal out moisture. The cores shall be constructed with low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Magnetic flux densities are to be kept well below the saturation point to prevent core overheating. The completed assembly shall be bolted to the base of the enclosure, but isolated by means of rubber vibration-absorbing mounts. There shall be no metal-to-metal contact between the core and coil and the enclosure except for a flexible safety ground strap. Sound isolation systems requiring the complete removal of all fastening devices will not be acceptable.

7. All transformers shall be equipped with a wiring compartment suitable for conduit

entry and large enough to allow convenient wiring.

D. The core of the transformer shall be visibly grounded to the enclosure by means of a flexible grounding conductor sized in accordance with applicable UL and NFPA 70 standards.


E. The transformer enclosure shall be ventilated heavy gauge, sheet steel construction. It shall be degreased, cleaned, and phosphatized, followed by electrostatic deposition of polymer polyester powder coating and baking cycle. The coating shall be UL listed for outdoor use. Provide NEMA 2 drip-proof, with lifting holes. The maximum temperature of the enclosure shall not exceed 90 degrees C.

F. Provide a 4” thick housekeeping pad under all floor mounted transformers. The pad

shall extend 6” beyond the dimensions of the transformer on all sides. G. Acceptable producers:

Eaton, General Electric, Square D, Siemens Approved manufacturers shall be registered firms in accordance with ISO 9001: 1994

SIC 3612 (US), which is the design and manufacturer of low voltage dry-type power, distribution, and specialty transformers.

2.5 HARMONIC MITIGATING TRANSFORMERS

A. General: Division 16 – Dry Type Transformers sections apply to work in this section. B. Ratings:

1. Transformer insulation system shall exceed NEMA ST20 standards and be rated

at 200 degrees C, UL-component-recognized, insulation system for full load operation at a maximum temperature rise of 130 degrees C. Required performance shall be obtained without exceeding the above indicated temperature rise in a 40 degrees C maximum ambient. Taps shall be two (2) steps above and four (4) steps below nominal voltage in 2.5% increments.

2. The transformer(s) shall supply a phase shift of -15°, 0°, +15°, or 30°. 3. Zero sequence impedance for transformers with zigzag secondaries must not

exceed 20% of the positive/negative sequence impedance. 4. Transformers shall have a minimum reactance of 2% in order to help reduce

neutral current when supplying loads with large amounts of third harmonic current.

5. Transformers shall be low loss type with minimum efficiencies per the table

below when operated at 35% of full load capacity. Efficiency shall be tested in accordance with NEMA TP-2.

Three-Phase kVA % Efficiency kVA % Efficiency

15.0 97.0 150.0 98.3 30.0 97.5 225.0 98.5

45.0 97.7 300.0 98.6

75.0 98.0 500.0 98.7 112.5 98.2 750.0 98.8


2.6 WIRING METHODS A. Conduit Systems: Acceptable types of conduit:

1. Hot dipped galvanized rigid steel (GRS) - Shall be galvanized steel, protected inside and outside.

2. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) - Shall be steel, protected inside and outside by

a coating of approved corrosion-resistant material such as zinc or cadmium. 3. Rigid Nonmetallic - Shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC), schedule 40 or schedule

80, as indicated on the drawings. 4. Flexible Metallic Conduit (½" min. trade size) (FLEX) - shall be galvanized steel,

protected inside and outside. 5. Liquid Tight Flexible Metallic Conduit (½" min. trade size) (LQFLEX) - shall be

galvanized steel, protected inside and outside with an extruded outer liquid tight, non-metallic, sunlight resistant jacket. Use with standard liquid tight fittings.

B. Raceway Fittings:

1. Rigid Metal Conduit - Shall have threaded fittings, galvanized steel or threadless

compression galvanized steel or threadless compression cadmium plated malleable iron. Fittings shall be rain tight/concrete tight.

2. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) - Material of steel or malleable iron is

acceptable. Couplings and connectors shall be concrete and rain tight, with connectors having insulated throats. Use gland and ring compression type couplings and connectors for conduit sizes 2” and smaller. Use set screw type couplings with four set screws each for conduit sizes over 2”. Use set screws of casehardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in wall of conduit for positive grounding. Indent type connectors or couplings are prohibited. Die-cast or pressure-cast zinc-alloy fittings or fittings made of “pot metal” are prohibited.

3. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit - shall have polyvinyl chloride (PVC) fittings suited for

the purpose and joined together by a method approved for the purpose. Schedule 80 conduit sections may be joined together with threaded fitting connectors.

4. Flexible Metal Conduit - fittings shall be zinc plated steel or cadmium plated mal-

leable iron screw type with insulated throat and angular wedge fitting between convolutions of conduit.

5. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit - fittings shall be cadmium plated, malleable

iron or steel with compression type steel ferrule and neoprene gasket sealing rings, with insulated throat.


C. Conduits installed in earth fill, in concrete, or in solid masonry structures shall be PVC 40. Where PVC 40 is used, the 90̊ elbows rising above grade or extending through the concrete envelope shall be GRS with 2 coats of bitumastic applied to conduit prior to installation. PVC 40 conduits subject to mechanical injury and all exterior exposed conduits shall be GRS.

D. Conduits used for connection to recessed lighting fixtures shall be FLEX not over 6

feet in total length. Conduits for connection to motors or vibrating equipment shall be LQFLEX not less than 18" long and not over 60" long.

E. Conduits run concealed in the hollow space of non-masonry walls or above suspended

ceilings shall be EMT. Exposed conduits shall be run at right angles to or parallel with building lines and exposed structure. In all cases, conduit runs shall be grouped together where possible and shall be supported from the building structure, not for any suspended ceiling support system.

F. PVC 80 shall be used only as indicated on the drawings and shall be UL listed as

sunlight resistant. Install conduits passing through building sidewalls or through beams below grade with expansion/deflection fittings. Install expansion fittings where conduit crosses an expansion joint. Where conduit penetrates damp-proofing membranes, cut the membrane carefully around the conduit and seal the joint with pressure sensitive tape.

G. Conduit Identification: Paint all conduit runs every ten feet. This painting shall be

accomplished by painting the conduit fittings to comply with the space limitation. Conduits shall be painted the following colors:

1. 208V and 240V White 2. 480V Orange 3. Fire Alarm Red 4. Intercom Yellow 5. CATV Black 6. Clocks Green 7. Data Blue

H. Support raceways securely with pipe straps, wall brackets, conduit hangers or ceiling

trapeze. Fastenings shall be by wood screws or screw type nails to wood, by toggle bolts to concrete block, expansion bolts on concrete or brick, and beam clamp types on steel or bar joists. Raceways shall not be fastened to suspended ceiling supports but must have independent support from the structure. Supporting devices shall be of materials having corrosion protection at least equal to the raceway. A support shall be provided as close as practical to, and not exceeding 18" from an unsupported box or from change of direction. In horizontal runs, this support may be omitted if the box is independently supported and the box connection is not made with chase nipple or threadless box connector. In vertical runs, load produced by weight of the raceway and conductors shall not be carried by the raceway terminal, but must be carried entirely by conduit supports. Install conduit supports in strict accordance with the following table, except as required by support for boxes and changes in direction:


MAXIMUM SUPPORT TRADE SIZE LOCATION OF RUNS SPACING ½, 3/4 Exposed, Horizontal 7 feet 1 and larger Exposed, Horizontal 10 feet All sizes Concealed, Horizontal 10 feet ½, 3/4 Exposed, Vertical 7 feet 1, 1 1/4 Exposed, Vertical 8 feet 1 1/2 and larger Exposed, Vertical 10 feet All sizes Concealed, Vertical 10 feet I. For conduit runs that are not sized on drawings, the maximum conduit fill shall be

computed using the requirements for Type THW conductors although the actual wiring is with Type THWN or other type of conductors having smaller cross-sections. This requirement is made to provide spare conduit capacity.

J. Install all required sleeves for conduits passing through concrete slabs. Fire proof

space between conduit and sleeve after installation using mineral wool. K. Provide seals for any opening through fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings used as

passage for electrical components such as conduit or electrical boxes. Cracks, voids, or holes up to 4" diameter shall be filled with putty, caulking, or one-piece intumescent elastomer which is non-corrosive to metal, compatible with synthetic cable jackets, and capable of expanding 10 times when exposed to flame or heat. For openings 4" or greater use a sealing system capable of passing 3-hour fire test in accordance with ASTM E-814. Sealing system shall consist of wall wrap or liner, partitions, and end caps capable of expanding when exposed to temperatures of 250 to 350F.

L. Conductors: All conductors shall be installed in conduit. Conductors for building

wiring shall have THHN/THWN, 600 volt insulation and shall be soft-drawn copper of standard American Wire Gauge (AWG) size. Minimum size shall be No. 12. 20 amp branch circuits more than 100 feet in length shall be upsized to No. 10. Provide individual neutral conductors for all single-pole branch circuits. Tied breaker handles are not acceptable. All wire No. 8 and larger shall be stranded. All branch circuits No. 10 and smaller shall be wired with color-coded wire with the same color used for a system throughout the building. Power feeders and branch circuits larger than No. 10 shall either be fully color coded or shall have black insulation and be similarly color coded with tape or paint in all junction boxes and panels. Where tape or paint is used to identify conductors, apply at all terminations, junction boxes, pull boxes and wireways. Apply tape, butt lapped, or paint for a minimum distance of 2" and, where applied to ends of conductors, start at cut end of the conductor insulation. Tape shall not cover manufacturers conductors shall be color coded or labeled as necessary for clear identification. Color coding of all conductors shall be as follows:

Grounding Bare or Green 120/240 volt Single Phase Phase Conductors: φA-Black, φB-Red Neutral: White


120/240 volt Three Phase (Delta) Phase Conductors: φA-Black, φB-Orange, φC-Blue Neutral: White 208Y120 volt Three Phase (wye) Phase Conductors: φA-Black, φB-Red, φC-Blue Neutral: White 480Y277 volt Three Phase (wye) Phase Conductors: φA-Brown, φB-Orange, φC-Yellow Neutral: Natural Grey 2.7 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

A. Junction and pull boxes shall meet requirements of National Electrical Code. Standard manufactured boxes shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Where custom designed and fabricated boxes are needed, they shall meet the construction standards of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. and the N.E.C.

B. Junction and pull boxes shall be installed where required by National Electrical Code

and where necessary to facilitate pulling of wire or cable. Considerations are sizes of wire and cable, number of bends in raceway, and conductor support requirements in vertical raceways. Maximum distance between terminations at junction or pull boxes, cabinets, or other points of termination shall not exceed 250 feet for straight horizontal runs. This length shall be decreased 50 feet for each 90̊ bend.

C. Junction boxes for exposed work shall be FS or FD type. Boxes shall be threaded,

cadmium-plated iron with weatherproof stainless steel cover and neoprene cover gaskets.

D. All junction boxes shall be provided with the following markings:

1. 208 or 240 volt boxes: Paint white and mark with panelboard/circuit number. 2. 480 volt boxes: Paint Orange and mark with panelboard/circuit number. 3. Intercom Boxes: Paint Yellow. 4. Fire Alarm Boxes: Paint Red. 5. Clock Boxes: Paint Green. 6. CATV Boxes: Paint Black. 7. Data Boxes: Paint Blue.

8. Junction Boxes Containing Emergency Circuits: Paint box color of voltage and provide a Red Strip. Label with panelboard/circuit number.

2.8 OUTLETS

A. Outlet boxes shall be one piece or projection welded, galvanized stamped steel for gang sizes required. Where several devices are located on drawings in the same general location, use multi-gang boxes. Sectional boxes are not acceptable. Boxes shall be sized in accordance with National Electrical Code. Boxes required for


communications systems, mechanical control devices, etc., shall be installed under this section of the specifications. Verify outlet box locations and sizes required for systems other than electrical power from shop and manufacturer's drawings, and install outlets as per those requirements.

B. Boxes for wall and ceiling outlets shall finish flush and straight. Wall outlets in

exposed concrete block, masonry, and tile walls shall be installed with extra deep square corner boxes or with standard boxes and square cornered tile wall covers so that conduit offsets are not required. Openings in concrete blocks or masonry walls shall be saw cut with an opening tolerance of 1/8" on all sides, the opening shall have bottom of box at nearest masonry joint to dimension indicated. For other wall finishes, boxes shall be installed with plaster or device type covers as required. No outlets shall be installed back-to-back. Where outlets occur in stud walls back to back on opposite sides, they shall be isolated by a stud between them.

C. Floor Boxes (at grade) shall be four-compartment cast iron combination box equal to

Wiremold Catalog No. RFB4-CI-1, complete with two CIHT-D internal duplex receptacle brackets and two CILT-2AB communication brackets. Provide brass-colored flanged activation kit (cover), UL listed for use on tile, terrazzo, carpet, and wood floors, equal to Wiremold Catalog No. S36BBTCBS.

D. Floor Boxes (above grade) shall be poke-through type, UL listed as suitable for use on

tile and terazzo floor applications, equal to Wiremold RC3ATCAB, complete with a 20A prewired duplex receptacle.

E. Multi-Outlet Assemblies (Horizontal Mounting) shall be electrically pre-wired steel

raceways with receptacles mounted 24' on center, equal to Wiremold Catalog No. V4000HR1024, equipped with two-circuit power wiring, and ready to accommodate Pass & Seymour activation inserts.

F. Multi-Outlet Assemblies (Vertical Mounting) shall be electrically pre-wired steel

raceways with receptacles mounted 24" on center, equal to Wiremold Catalog No. V4000TD8, equipped with two-circuit power wiring, and ready to accommodate Pass & Seymour activation inserts.

2.9 WIRING DEVICES

A. Colors: Wiring device and wall plate colors shall be selected by Architect for individual rooms from one of the following colors (unless another color is noted): Almond, black, brown, white, gray, ivory, or light almond.

B. Receptacles: Duplex receptacles shall be specification grade, 20 amps,125 volts with

grounding terminal. C. Switches: Switches shall be specification grade, 20 amps, 120/277 volts A-C only,

single pole, three-way or four-way as shown, single throw with screw terminals arranged for side wiring.

D. Device Plates: Shall be of the constructed of polycarbonate.


E. Ground Fault Receptacles: Furnish and install receptacles with ground fault circuit

interrupters as indicated on plans. Receptacles shall be NEMA 5-20R configuration with 120V ac 20 amperes circuit rating. All receptacles shall be such depth as to permit mounting in outlet boxes 1 1/2" or greater in depth without the use of spacers. Units shall have line and load terminals such that connection to load terminals will provide ground fault protection for other receptacles. All receptacles shall accept standard duplex wall plates. All receptacles shall be noise suppressed and shall be UL listed.

F. Isolated Ground (IG) Receptacles: Furnish and install specification grade type IG

receptacles, orange in color. Plates for these devices shall also be stainless steel, compatible with the receptacle type.

G. Automated Lighting Controls: Where indicated on the drawings, provide occupancy

sensors, time switches, control relays and wiring for automatic control of lighting fixtures. Controls shall be as manufactured by Watt-Stopper, Hubbell, Cooper, or Leviton.

2.10 LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Provide wired, cleaned, and with lamps specified, all fixtures designated on drawings. Contractor shall verify the ceiling construction for correct trim and support arrangement of lighting fixtures; corrosion resistant plaster frames are required in plaster ceilings. Shop drawing submittals shall consist of properly identified copies of manufacturer's catalog pages showing all features and accessories specified.

B. Secure mounting and support of all lighting fixtures shall be accomplished under this

section of these specifications. Lighting fixtures shall be installed plumb, square, and level with the ceiling, wall, and in alignment with adjacent lighting fixtures. Mounting heights indicated shall be to the bottom of the fixture for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to center of fixture for wall-mounted fixtures. Lay-in troffer fixtures shall be supported with a minimum of 4 ceiling support wires per fixture and not more than 6 inches from each corner of the fixture. For fixtures smaller in size than the ceiling grid, provide a minimum of four wires per fixture. Do not support fixtures by ceiling acoustical panels. All concealed fixture mounting accessories shall be securely tied to structure. Flexible connections to fixtures shall not exceed 6 feet in length. Fixtures shall be solidly grounded to raceway system.

C. In areas where the reflected ceiling plan is shown, all work shall be in conformance

with this plan. If the ceiling grid is installed other than shown on the electrical plan, it shall be the responsibility of the installer of the lighting fixtures to call this fact immediately to the attention of the Architect and Contractor, and work shall not proceed until Architect's decision in the matter is obtained.

D. Fluorescent ballasts shall be electronic type, class A noise rating, class P safety

standards, high power factor greater than .98, programmed start, auto restart, 10% total harmonic distortion or less, 42 kHz – 54 kHz hertz ballast frequency, .85 or greater ballast factor, less than 1.7 lamp current crest factor, meeting the requirements


of ANSI/IEE C62.41 & C82.11, FCC Part 18 (RFI & EMI), CBM, UL, Public Law No. 100-357, and NAECA. All ballasts shall include internal fusing. Ballast shall be compatible for use with energy saving lamps. For outdoor applications ballast shall be rated for zero degrees Fahrenheit starting temperature.

E. High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamp ballasts shall be high power factor type greater

than .98, protected by in-line fuse, UL 1029, UL class P, ANSI C82.4, 15% total harmonic distortion or less, 100 kHz – 200 kHz ballast frequency , end-of-life detection and shutdown. Ballasts in fixtures for interior spaces shall be encapsulated in a Class H potting compound to provide a Class A noise rating. Ballasts in fixtures installed outdoors shall be weatherproof. Provide 0 degrees Fahrenheit starting temperature for HID below 250W. Provide -20 degrees Fahrenheit starting for HID 250W and above.

F. LED drivers shall be highly efficient, class A noise rating, 0.9 or greater power factor,

power supplies rated for the wattage requirements of the fixture. THD at full load shall be <10% at 120v and <20% at 277v. <3% line regulation, <1W stand-by power. LED power up time to be <1 sec. Load regulation <5%. Provide over voltage protection, non-latching output short circuit protection, current reduction LED load temperature protection. Ambient operating temperature range -30 degrees Celsius to 50 degrees Celsius at 85% non condensing relative humidity. Driver shall meet ANSI C62.41 Cat.A 2.5kv transient protection. Power supply shall be field programmable with 1mA resolution. Programmer shall not require the power supply to be powered up or connected to AC line voltage while programming. Provide integrated configurable LED thermal protection. Drivers shall be universal voltage input. Power supply shall be UL Class 2. LED dimming drivers shall provide continuous flicker-free dimming from 100%-1%.

F. All lamps shall be the product of one manufacturer and shall be as manufactured by

General Electric Osram/Sylvania, or Phillips. HPS lamps shall comply with the current published ANSI standards.

2.11 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protections: Take necessary precautions to protect all material, equipment, apparatus, and work from damage. Failure to do so to the satisfaction of the Architect will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the material, equipment, or work in question. Contractor is responsible for the safety and good condition of the materials installed until final acceptance by the Owner.

B. Cleaning: Conduit openings shall be capped or plugged during installation. Fixtures

and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, moisture, chemical, and mechanical injury. At the completion of the work, the fixtures, material and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and delivered in condition satisfactory to the Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING A. Trenches for all underground conduits shall be excavated to the required depth. The

bottom of trenches shall be tamped hard. Before backfilling the excavation shall be cleaned of trash and debris. Backfill shall consist of excavation or borrow of sand, gravel, or other approved material free of trash, lumber, sawdust or other debris. Backfill shall be placed in 9" thick moistured and hand or machine tamped layers. Backfill shall be brought to suitable elevation above ground to provide for anticipated settlement and shrinkage. All paving broken up shall be repaired and returned to the original condition.

3.2 PAINTING A. Contractor shall touch-up or refinish all items of electrical equipment furnished with a

factory finish coat of paint and which may have been damaged regardless of cause. 3.3 TESTING AND BALANCING A. Balance all single phase loads connected to all panelboards to ensure an approximate

equal division on these loads on main power supply serving building. All tests shall be made in accordance with the latest standards of the IEEE and the NEC. The installation shall be tested for performance, grounds and insulation resistance. "Megger" type instruments shall be used. Contractor shall perform circuit continuity and operational tests on all equipment furnished or connected by Contractor. The tests shall be made prior to final inspection. The Contractor shall provide all testing equipment and all costs shall be borne by him. Written reports shall be made of all tests. These reports shall be turned over to the Architect at time of final inspection. All faults shall be corrected immediately.

3.4 CLEANING UP A. The Contractor shall remove all oil, grease, or other stains resulting from his work

performed in the building or the exterior thereof. END OF SECTION 16100

PROJECT MANUAL FOR Tenant Improvements for MEDQUEST ... · DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS. Tenant...

Documents

Transcript of PROJECT MANUAL FOR Tenant Improvements for MEDQUEST ... · DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS. Tenant...